Nokia Solutions and Networks T5DS1 Cellular CDMA base station User Manual 1X SC4812T BTS Optimization ATP Release 2 16 3 x

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	383443
Application ID	zz91sKP9D+Ul4xYfUsMjZg==
Document Description	User Manual 3
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	151.4kB (1892521 bits)
Date Submitted	2003-12-19 00:00:00
Date Available	2003-12-19 00:00:00
Creation Date	2003-11-06 11:47:19
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2003-11-06 11:52:06
Document Title	1X SC4812T BTS Optimization/ATP; Release 2.16.3.x
Document Author:	Motorola

Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Test Equipment Set-up for RF Path Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-35: Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path Calibration
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 (on page 3-17) to interface the LMF
computer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.
If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-6 (on page 3-26) to start a GUI LMF session.
If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-27 (on page 3-78).
NOTE
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.
For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, or
Figure 3-19, depending on the communications analyzer being used.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
NOTE
If both the BTS–x.cdf and CBSC–x.cdf files are current, all
information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the carrier and
channel will have to be set for each test.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
S At sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level
(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX output level.
S Example: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-89
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
TX Calibration and the LMF
The LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...
selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). The
All Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TX
calibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and perform
TX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TX
calibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TX
audit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA Test
Parameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or All
Cal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features which
are described in the following subsections.
Rate Set Drop-down Pick List
The Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is
selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and
3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the
test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and
2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.
Verify BLO
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the
Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss... function.
Single-Sided BLO Checkbox
Another option that appears in the pull–down menu is Single–sided
BLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus–or–minus some
offset. The ranges that we currently use for calibration are wider than
necessary to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of that
range is where non–redundant BBXs should be. When Single–sided
BLO is selected, the result is only considered a success if it is in the
lower half of the range. If it was normally a success from 37–47 (which
is 42 "5), Single–sided BLO would make it a success only if the result
was from 37–42. To get the more stringent conditions, the operator
checks Single–sided BLO when calibrating non–redundant transceivers.
Single–sided BLO carries the likelihood of more failures. This option
should only be used by experienced CFEs.
3-90
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Test Pattern Drop-down Pick List
The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Pattern
pull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:
S Pilot (default) – performs tests using a pilot signal only. This pattern
should be used when running in–service tests. It only requires a BBX
to do the test.
S Standard – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six
traffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non–in–service
tests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gain
values specified by the IS97 standard.
S CDFPilot –performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gain
is specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot to
generate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGain
parameter in the CDF file instead of a pre–determined value.
S CDF – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic
channels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified in
the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standard
pattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings for
the following CDF parameters are used:
– PilotGain
– PchGain
– SchGain
– NomGain1Way
Set-up for TX Calibration
The workaround in Table 3-36 allows the user to manually set the BLO
limits to ensure that the redundant BBX BLO test does not fail due to the
preset offset being incorrectly set for the frame under test. A future LMF
release will correct this problem.
Table 3-36: Initial Set-up for TX Calibration
n Step
Oct 2003
Action
Delete the existing calibration file (if any) from the BTS folder on LMF
laptop from the location C:\wlmf\cdma\bts–#, where # is the BTS
number.
To edit the nominal TX BLO, from the Util menu, select Edit > TX
Nominal Offset. In the TX Cal Parameter window, make any necessary
changes to ensure the Tx BLO Nominal Offset (in dB) is correct:
– For 800 MHz, the value is 45.0 (dB), OR
– For 1900 MHz, the value is 43.0 (dB).
Download the data, which includes BLO values, to all the BBXs. From the
Device menu, select Download > Data
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-91
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
TX Calibration
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handling
any circuit card or module. If this is not done, there is a high
probability that the card or module could be damaged by ESD.
All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
The LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentially
identical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired
(Refer to Step 4 in Table 3-37).
Prerequisites
Before running this procedure, be sure that the following have been
done:
S The card in slot CSM 1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code
and data loads.
S Primary CSM and MGLI are INS_ACT (bright green).
S All BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
S If running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,
MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
S Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.
NOTE
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved
since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.
All Cal Audit/TX Path Calibration procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the All Cal/Audit and TX
path calibration test.
Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
n Step
3-92
Action
If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following the
procedure in Table 3-35.
Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to
“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration Procedure
n Step
Action
For All Cal Audit...
– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–down
menus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
For TX Calibration
– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down
menus. A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed
in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels
box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).
If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.
* IMPORTANT
Single–Sided BLO should only be used for primary BBXs. Do not check the box when
calibrating the redundant BBX.
10
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list
(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section
– see page 3-91).
11
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
12
Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process is
completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
13
Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-93
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX devices.
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
S TX calibration is successfully completed.
Follow the steps in Table 3-38 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.
Table 3-38: Download BLO
n Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download
> BLO from the pull–down menus. A status report
window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is
downloaded.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is
used.
NOTE
3-94
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download
to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to
performing the calibration audit.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
TX Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots
per the procedure in Table 3-39
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure
does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of
the All Cal/Audit.
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM–1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-95
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
TX Path Audit procedure
After a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO data
in the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to
perform a BTS TX path audit.
Table 3-39: BTS TX Path Audit
n Step
Action
If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedure
in Table 3-35 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).
Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to
“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).
Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX>TX Audit... from the pull–down menus. A
CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in the
Channels/Carrier pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to
select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
The correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step 2, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.
NOTE
Single–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern from the drop–down list (refer to “Test Pattern
Drop–down Pick List” – see page 3-91).
10
Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.
11
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. When the calibration process is
completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.
12
Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the Status Report window and provides information in the
Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the
test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
3-96
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
NOTE
If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO data is
automatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portion
of the test is run.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
CSM–1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code and data loads.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-40 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels
keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-40: All Cal/Audit Test
n Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be tested.
NOTE
If STANDARD, CDFPilot, or CDF is selected for the TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC
must be also selected.
From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the  or  key to select multiple items.
Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
If at least one MCC was selected in Step1 select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600
1X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.
NOTE
The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Select Verify BLO or Single–sided BLO.
NOTE
Single–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.
In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern from the drop–down list (refer to “Test Pattern
Drop–down Pick List” – see page 3-91).
Click on OK.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-97
Bay Level Offset Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-40: All Cal/Audit Test
n Step
10
Action
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. A status report window displays the
test results.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it
can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
exists. Note the following:
S The Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
WARNING
The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this action can
cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To
manually edit the CAL file, you must first logout of the BTS. If
you manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File
function, the edited information is lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
S BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.
Creating a CAL File
Table 3-41: Create CAL File
n Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs.
NOTE
The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item. A status report
window displays the results of the action.
Click OK to close the status report window.
3-98
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
RFDS Description
NOTE
The RFDS is not available for the –48 V BTS at the time of this
publication.
The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from
an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:
S Antenna Select Unit (ASU)
S Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)
S Subscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA
CDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDS
User’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function on–line
documentation.
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts–#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match the
installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editable
parameters and their defaults. Table 3-42 explains how to edit the
parameter settings.
S RfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
S TsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
S MC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
S Asu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
S TestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
NOTE
Oct 2003
Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf file to verify,
view, or modify data. Because the bts–#.cdf file is generated on
a Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoft
WordPad, will display file content in a more easily–read format
than many simple text editors.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-99
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters
Follow the procedure in Table 3-42 to review and/or edit RFDS
parameters.
Table 3-42: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
Important! Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file:
EXAMPLE:
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
Mc1Equip = 0
Mc2Equip = 0
Mc3Equip = 0
Mc4Equip = 0
RfdsEquip = 2
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’
TsuEquip = 1
NOTE
The above is an example of entries extracted from the bts–#.cdf file that should have been generated
by the OMC–R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the
RFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.
Save changes and/or quit the editor.
Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session (refer to Table 3-6).
If no changes were made to the bts–#.cdf file fields listed in Step 2, proceed to Step 6. If changes were
made, continue with Step 8.
NOTE
To make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)
when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
6f
6g
6h
When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts–#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to the
MGLI by performing the following:
– To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundant
GLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelf
slot.
– Click on the MGLI.
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull–down menu. A status
report window shows the status of the operation.
– When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
– Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull–down menus
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window shows
the status of the download.
– Click OK to close the status report window.
– Click on the MGLI.
. . . continued on next page
3-100
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-42: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step
Action
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down menu. A status
report window shows the status of the operation.
– When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.
6i
6jj
! CAUTION
When the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. During
this process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2–3 minutes.
DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.
6k
– Re–seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejector
tabs.
– Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTS
menu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull–down menus.
6l
Any MCCs that were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, downloaded with
data, and re–enabled as follows:
– Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar and
clicking on MCCs in the pull–down menu.
– In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull–down menu. A status
report window shows the status of the operation.
– Click OK to close the status report window.
– Repeat Step 7a to select the MCCs.
– Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select Download > Data from the pull–down menu.
(Selected devices do not change colot when data is downoaded.)
– A status report window shows the status of the download.
– Click on OK to close the status report window.
– When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-17.
7a
7b
7c
7d
7e
7f
7g
Click on the RFDS tab.
Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:
9a
9b
– Click on the SUA to select it.
– Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull–down menu. A status
report shows the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
– Click OK to close the status report window.
9c
NOTE
If the LMF displays an error message, check the following:
Oct 2003
Ensure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
Verify RFDS has power.
Verify RFDS status LED is green.
Verify entries in RFDS fields of the bts–#.cdf file are correct (refer to Step 2).
Status the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the proper
state (INS_ACT (bright green)).
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-101
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to be
programmed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, or
be used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must be
programmed with the appropriate system parameters and phone number
during hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must be
recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.
NOTE
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM
Table 3-43 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-43: Definition of Parameters
Access_Overload_Code
Slot_Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary_Channel_A
Primary_Channel_B
Secondary_Channel_A
Secondary_Channel B
These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.
Lock_Code
Security_Code
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
Do not change.
IMSI_11_12
IMSI_MCC
These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN Phone Number
This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and
MIN should be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE
This field is different from the TODN field in the bts–#.cdf file. The
MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN is
the number the subscriber calls.
3-102
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-44 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.
Table 3-44: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
Minimum
Maximum
15
Slot_Index
System ID
32767
Network ID
32767
Primary_Channel_A
25
1175
Primary_Channel_B
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_A
25
1175
Secondary_Channel_B
25
1175
Lock_Code
999
Security_Code
999999
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
255
IMSI_11_12
99
IMSI_MCC
999
N/A
N/A
NAM Field Name
Access_Overload_Code
MIN Phone Number
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-103
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.
Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is not
installed. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is
required if an RFDS is installed.
Prerequisite
S Logged into the BTS
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to set antenna map data for the
RFDS.
Table 3-45: Set Antenna Map Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull–down menus. A
tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to select
the antenna map to be edited.
Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the column
where entry or editing is needed.
Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–Antenna Map... section of LMF Help function
on–line documentation for antenna map examples.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
3-104
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered.
Prerequisite
S LMF is logged into the BTS
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the
antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
NOTE
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to set the RFDS Configuration Data.
Table 3-46: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step
Action
Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull–down
menus. A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.
In the data entry pop–up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configuration
tab, as required.
To add a new antenna number, perform the following:
3a
– Click on the Add Row button.
3b
– Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.
3c
– Enter the desired data.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit–RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Help
function on–line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.
NOTE
S Values entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window is
dismissed.
S Entered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out and
log back into the LMF for changes to take effect.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-105
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RX
paths.
TX Path Calibration – For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS
XCVR is keyed at a pre–determined power level and the BTS power
output level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measured
at the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring test
equipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference
(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at the
TX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration
offset value.
RX Path Calibration – For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is
keyed at a pre–determined power level and the power input level is
measured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power level
measured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directional
coupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)
between the RFDS–keyed power level and power level measured at the
BTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
RFDS calibration and the CAL file – The TX and RX RFDS
calibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]
Block.
TSIC channel frequency – For each RFDS TSIC, the channel
frequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of the
appropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-47.
Table 3-47: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies
WARNING
System
Channel Calibration Points
800 MHz (A and B)
341 and 682
1.9 GHz
408 and 791
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT
connector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
Prerequisites
S Test equipment has been selected.
S Test equipment and test cables have been calibrated.
S TX calibration has been performed and BLO data has been
downloaded to the BBXs.
S Test equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.
S Antenna map data has been entered for the site.
S BBXs are OOS–RAM.
3-106
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
RFDS Calibration Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-48 to perform RFDS calibration.
Table 3-48: RFDS Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
In the LMF, select the CDMA BTS–xxx tab.
If the BTS Control button is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS
menu bar to select it.
Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration
(refer to Table 1-6 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).
Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull–down menu. An
RFDS Calibration set–up window will be displayed.
In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required
Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-47) in the Channel Field box. To enter more
than one channel number, use the following methods:
– Separate non–sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces;
for example: 247,585,742.
– Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the range
separated by a dash and no spaces;
for example: 385–395.
If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.
Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrl
key while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)–sector(s)).
Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the drop–down list if performing RX
calibration.
10
Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up
window.
11
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
12
When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.
13
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
14
Click on the Frame tab.
15
Select the MGLI by clicking on it.
16
Download updated RFDS offset data to the MGLI (see Step 6 in Table 3-42).
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-107
RFDS Set–up and Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Program TSU NAM
The NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test
calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S MGLI is INS.
S TSU is powered up and has a code load.
Program NAM Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-49 to program the TSU NAM.
Table 3-49: Program the TSU NAM
Step
Action
Select the RFDS tab.
Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).
Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull–down menu. A
NAM programming window will appear.
Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-43 and Table 3-44).
Click on the OK button to display the status report.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3-108
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
Objective
This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the
cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules
equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner
and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active
CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA
reference signal.
Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options
included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic
power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the
following tables should be bypassed.
Table 3-52. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-53. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)
Table 3-54. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests
Table 3-55. PA Redundancy Test
Table 3-56. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master
GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.
Test Equipment
The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:
S LMF
S Communications Test Set
Redundancy/Alarm Test
Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to
confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The
procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:
Oct 2003
Power supply/converter modules in all frames
Distribution shelf modules in the BTS frame
C–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)
PA modules in the BTS frame
AMR Customer defined input/output tests
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-109
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Test Equipment Setup
Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to set up test equipment:
NOTE
All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1
Table 3-50: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on
the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-5, page 3-17).
Login to the BTS.
Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see
Figure 3-16).
NOTE
If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI and
BBX boards installed in any redundant slot positions at this
time.
Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.
Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the
AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by clicking on MGLI, then
selecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.
NOTE
During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious
alarms may report. Allow the BTS to stabilize for 10 seconds.
If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has
stabilized, determine the cause before proceeding further.
3-110
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Power Supply Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the power supply
modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm
monitor) are also verified.
Table 3-51: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.
Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-27).
– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
– Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS–1.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.
NOTE
For +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.
On –48 V systems, remove PS–4 (see Figure 3-28).
– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
– Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS–4.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS–5 through PS–9.
10
Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.
11
Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-111
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
MPC/EMPC–1
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Á
Á Á
Á
MPC/EMPC–2
Switch
BBX–12
BBX–11
BBX–10
BBX–9
BBX–8
BBX–7
MCC–12
MCC–11
MCC–10
MCC–9
MCC–8
MCC–7
GLI2–2
AMR–2
38 mm Filler Panel
CCD–2
CSM–2
CCD–1
CIO
BBX–6
BBX–R
BBX–5
BBX–4
BBX–3
BBX–2
BBX2–1
MCC–6
MCC–5
MCC–4
MCC–3
MCC–2
GLI2–1
MCC–1
AMR–1
PS–3
PS–2
PS–1
CSM–1
HSO/LFR
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC–1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or BBX–1Xs.
GLIs may be GLI2s or
GLI3s.
FW00295
Figure 3-28: –48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM
FRONT
1A 30
1B
1C 30
1D
2A 30
PS–9
PS–8
PS–7
PS–6
PS–5
PS–4
L 2C
A 3A
AMR
19 mm Filler Panel
Figure 3-27: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf
30
2B
2D
30
3B
3C 30
3D
4A 30
4B
4C 30
4D
FW00501
3-112
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests
Follow the steps in Table 3-52 to verify alarms reported by the master
GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure
occurs.
Table 3-52: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.
Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:
• Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-29 or Figure 3-30).
• Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.
NOTE
Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.
Starter Frames Only: Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.
• Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-27) one at a time.
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.
Expansion Frames Only: Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.
• Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-27) one at a time
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.
• Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-27).
• Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.
• Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm
monitor).
• Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-113
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Figure 3-29: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
FAN
MODULE
REAR
REAR
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FAN MODULES
FW00130
Figure 3-30: –48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
REAR
PWR/ALM
FRONT
PWR/ALM
FW00489
FAN MODULES
BBX Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-53 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the
C–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the
alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional
sectors at the customer’s discretion.
3-114
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-53: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.
Remove the primary BBX.
Observe a carrier is still present.
The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.
Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective
frequency.
Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.
The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.
Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
10
Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each
respective frequency:
11
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
12
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-115
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Follow the procedure in Table 3-54 to verify the manual redundancy of
the CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is
also covered.
NOTE
DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-54, unless the site is
configured with a LORAN–C or HSO timebase as a backup for
the GPS.
Table 3-54: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame.
This forces the LORAN–C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.
Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.
Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.
S Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.
Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.
S Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.
Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.
S Various CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.
S Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.
S Verify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go
OOS_RAM.
Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.
10
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.
. . . continued on next page
3-116
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-54: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.
11
Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.
S Various CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.
S Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
12
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
13
Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.
S Verify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.
S Observe PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.
14
Oct 2003
Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-117
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
Power Amplifier (PA) Redundancy Test
Follow the procedure in Table 3-55 to verify redundancy of the Power
Amplifiers (PA).
WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFORE
moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Table 3-55: Power Amplifier Redundancy Test
Step
Action
From the pulldown menu select:
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain> Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Key-up the BBX assigned to the PAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).
Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrier
amplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.
NOTE
See Figure 3-19 for test equipment setup, if required.
Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st PA of the pair.
NOTE
After power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for the
removal of the 1st PA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must be
complete before proceeding.
Verify:
• The other PA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the PA.
• The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzer
display remains basically unchanged.
• PA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.
Re-apply power to the PA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.
Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd PA of the pair.
De-key the BBX.
n WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
3-118
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify PAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cable
on top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
68P09258A31–A
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
CAUTION
This test can only be performed when the MM path is established
by the MM (not just with LAPD link connected). Attempting to
force the GLIs to “hot swap” under alarm monitor control, when
isolated from the MM, causes MGLIs to hang up.
Table 3-56: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)
Step
Action
NOTE
S This test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected
and communication is established with the MM.
S BOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.
Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.
Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.
Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.
Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.
Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-119
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and
Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and
output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active
sensors as well controlling output devices.
The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals
coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm
connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of
the frame (see Figure 3-31). The ALARM A connector is always
functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped
in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors
input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input
numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-32). State transitions on these input
lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.
ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8
outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are
available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set
by the CBSC.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the  key (for
individual selections) or  key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
S The Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause
button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When
the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.
Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and
the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.
S The Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that
occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.
S The Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.
3-120
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Figure 3-31: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
59
59
60
60
ti-CDMA-WP-00041-v01-ildoc-ftw
Purpose
The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay
contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR
alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform
these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported
properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system
performance.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays
meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation
Manual.
NOTE
Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand this
procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:
S LMF
S Alarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional
NOTE
Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are
defined as:
S NC = normally closed
S NO = normally open
S COM or C = common
S CDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output
S CDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-121
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Figure 3-32: AMR Connector Pin Numbering
A CDI 18
...
A CDI 1
Returns
60
26
60
26
59
25
59
25
ALARM A
(AMR 1)
Returns
ALARM B
(AMR 2)
B CDI 36
...
B CDI 19
FW00302
NOTE
The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the Alarms
Test Box Procedure, Table 3-57. If not using an Alarm Test Box,
follow the procedure listed in Table 3-58.
CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box
Table 3-57 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using
the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results
with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default
delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box switches in the new
position until the alarms have been reported.
Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-31).
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for
each switch setting.
10
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported
for each switch setting.
11
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
12
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
13
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each
switch setting
. . . continued on next page
3-122
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
14
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each
switch setting.
15
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
21
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
22
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.
23
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
24
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
25
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
26
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.
27
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
28
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
29
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
30
Select the MGLI.
31
Click on the Device menu.
32
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
33
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
34
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
35
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
36
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-123
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-57: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
37
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
38
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
39
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
40
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
41
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box
Table 3-58 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification
without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed
and compare results with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default
delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait for the alarm
report before removing the short.
Table 3-58: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Select the MGLI.
10
Click on the Device menu.
11
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
. . . continued on next page
3-124
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Table 3-58: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
12
Click on Normally Closed.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
13
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
14
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
15
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click on OK to close the status report window.
21
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
22
Refer to Figure 3-32 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
23
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
3-125
Alarms Testing
68P09258A31–A
Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
Table 3-59 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.
Table 3-59: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
Wire
Pin Color
Alarm A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Blu/Wht
Wht/Blu
Org/Wht
Wht/Org
Grn/Wht
Wht/Grn
Brn/Wht
Wht/Brn
Slt/Wht
Wht/Slt
Blu/Red
Red/Blu
Org/Red
Red/Org
Grn/Red
Red/Grn
Brn/Red
Red/Brn
Slt/Red
Red/Slt
Blu/Blk
Blk/Blu
Org/Blk
Blk/Org
Grn/Blk
Blk/Grn
Brn/Blk
Blk/Brn
Slt/Blk
A CDO1 NC
A CDO1 Com
A CDO1 NO
A CDO2 NC
A CDO2 Com
A CDO2 NO
A CDO3 NC
A CDO3 Com
A CDO3 NO
A CDO4 NC
A CDO4 Com
A CDO4 NO
A CDO5 NC
A CDO5 Com
A CDO5 NO
A CDO6 NC
A CDO6 Com
A CDO6 NO
A CDO7 NC
A CDO7 Com
A CDO7 NO
A CDO8 NC
A CDO8 Com
A CDO8 NO
Cust Retn 1
A CDI 1
Cust Retn 2
A CDI 2
Cust Retn 3
30
Blk/Slt
A CDI 3
Signal Name
Alarm B
B CDO9 NC
B CDO9 Com
B CDO9 NO
B CDO10 NC
B CDO10 Com
B CDO10 NO
B CDO11 NC
B CDO11 Com
B CDO11 NO
B CDO12 NC
B CDO12 Com
B CDO12 NO
B CDO13 NC
B CDO13 Com
B CDO13 NO
B CDO14 NC
B CDO14 Com
B CDO14 NO
B CDO15 NC
B CDO15 Com
B CDO15 NO
B CDO16 NC
B CDO16 Com
B CDO16 NO
B CDI 19
Cust Retn 19
B CDI 20
Cust Retn 20
B CDI 21
*Pwr Conv Alm
Cust Retn 21
*Pwr Conv Retn
+27V
–48V
+27V
–48V
Wire
Pin Color
Signal Name
Alarm A
Alarm B
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Blu/Yel
Yel/Blu
Org/Yel
Yel/Org
Grn/Yel
Yel/Grn
Brn/Yel
Yel/Brn
Slt/Yel
Yel/Slt
Blu/Vio
Vio/Blu
Org/Vio
Vio/Blu
Grn/Vio
Vio/Grn
Brn/Vio
Vio/Brn
Slt/Vio
Vio/Slt
Red/Wht
Wht/Red
Blk/Wht
Wht/Blk
Yel/Wht
Wht/Yel
Vio/Wht
Wht/Vio
Blk/Red
Cust Retn 4
A CDI 4
Cust Retn 5
A CDI 5
Cust Retn 6
A CDI 6
Cust Retn 7
A CDI 7
Cust Retn 8
A CDI 8
Cust Retn 9
A CDI 9
Cust Retn 10
A CDI 10
Cust Retn 11
A CDI 11
Cust Retn 12
A CDI 12
Cust Retn 13
A CDI 13
Cust Retn 14
A CDI 14
Cust Retn 15
A CDI 15
Cust Retn 16
A CDI 16
Cust Retn 17
A CDI 17
Cust Retn 18
B CDI 22
Cust Retn 22
B CDI 23
Cust Retn 23
B CDI 24
Cust Retn 24
B CDI 25
Cust Retn 25
B CDI 26
Cust Retn 26
B CDI 27
Cust Retn 27
B CDI 28
Cust Retn 28
B CDI 29
Cust Retn 29
B CDI 30
Cust Retn 30
B CDI 31
Cust Retn 31
B CDI 32
Cust Retn 32
B CDI 33
Cust Retn 33
B CDI 34
Cust Retn 34
B CDI 35
Cust Retn 35
B CDI 36
60
Red/Blk
A CDI 18
Cust Retn 36
NOTE
*For –48V, reserved for Power Supply Module Alarm signal. NOT for use as CDOs or CDIs.
All Cust Rtrn 1–18 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.
All Cust Rtrn 19–36 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.
CDO = Customer Defined Output; CDI = Customer Defined Input;
NC – normally closed, NO – normally open, Com – common
The “A CDI” numbering is from the LMF/OMCR/CBSC perspective. LMF/OMCR/CBSC starts the numbering at 19
(giving 19 – 36). Actual cable hardware starts the numbering at 0 (giving 0–17)
3-126
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Chapter 4
Automated Acceptance Test
Procedure
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and
supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)
assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands.
NOTE
– Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the
“Caveats” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
– The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)
sectors only.
– DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the
LMF.
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed for
calibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.
4-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. If
license–governing bodies require documentation supporting
SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.
Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS
site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE
must perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):
1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,
and FER tests.
2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-3) to
determine the applicable test that must be performed.
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward
link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and
TX code domain.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set
components, if required.
Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performed
and the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
ATP Test Options
There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to
completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the
following ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides the
procedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATP
tests according to one of the following ATP testing options:
ATP Testing Option 1
S All TX/RX test – Executes all the TX and RX tests as described in
testing option 2.
ATP Testing Option 2
S All TX test – TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line
up. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,
and RF cables.
S All RX test – RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line
up. These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for
expansion frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive
components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.
ATP Testing Option 3
These tests can be run individually:
4-4
TX Mask test
Rho test
Pilot Time Offset test
Code Domain Power test
FER test
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path
calibrated, BLO downloaded, and TX audited before all the TX
and RX tests are run.
NOTE
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the card
slot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode before
starting the automated testing.
NOTE
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
ATP Test Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been
completed:
S BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
S CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have
correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
No BBXs are keyed (transmitting).
BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).
Test cables are calibrated.
Test equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-19 through
Figure 3-24 starting on page 3-68).
S Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
S GPIB is on.
S BTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be
performed.
WARNING
Before performing the FER, be sure that all PAs are turned OFF
(circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properly
terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or
equipment damage.
TX OUT Connection
NOTE
Oct 2003
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites
without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via the BTS
TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed, all
measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler TX
OUT connector.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-5
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
WARNING
NOTE
4-6
LMF
Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
Communications system analyzer
Signal generator for FER testing (required for all communications
system analyzers for 1X FER)
– Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA
channels keyed.
– At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the PAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specific
aspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.
All testing is performed using the LMF GUI environment.
TX Testing
TX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output power
control. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated test
equipment. All measurements are made at the appropriate BTS TX OUT
connector(s).
TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA forward link using
selected BBXs assigned to respective sector antennas. Each BBX is
keyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbxlevel and BLO)
at the CDF file–specified carrier output power level.
RX Testing
RX testing verifies receive antenna paths for BBXs selected for the test.
All tests are performed using the external, calibrated test equipment to
inject a CDMA RF carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX
frequency at the appropriate BTS RX IN connector(s).
RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA reverse link using all
equipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.
Individual Tests
The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests.
Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with
respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-7
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).
4-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
ATP Test Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
Step
Action
Be sure that all prerequisites described on page 4-5 have been met.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than the
one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the new
Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.
Select the device(s) to be tested.
From the Tests menu, select the desired test from the pulldown menu:
– All TX/RX ATP... / All TX ATP... / All RX ATP... or
– TX > (TX Mask... / Rho... / Pilot Time Offset... / Code Domain Power...) or
– RX > FER...
Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick
list. To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channels
box. If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.
NOTE
If necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.
If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.
NOTE
Single–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.
For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list.
In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the
drop–down list.
NOTE
The Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non–1X cards are selected for the test.
The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.
Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By default,
all channel elements are specified.
Use one of the following methods to enter more than one channel element:
– Enter non–sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;
0,5,15).
– Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements
separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).
NOTE
The channel element numbers are 0 based; that is the first channel element is 0.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-9
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures
68P09258A31–A
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
Step
10
Action
If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.
NOTE
S Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.
S Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This requires
an MCC to be selected.
S Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
S Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the gain
for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
11
Click on the OK button. The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
12
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begin
testing. The test results are displayed in the status report window.
13
Click on Save Results or Dismiss. If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test
report file.
4-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Individual ATP Test Background Information
68P09258A31–A
Individual ATP Test Background Information
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test (Tx Mask)
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level
to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain
set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
S 1.7/1.9 GHz:
– at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
– at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
S 800 MHz:
–
–
–
–
at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-11
Individual ATP Test Background Information
68P09258A31–A
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
– 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
+ 900 kHz
+750 kHz
FW00282
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the
result meets system tolerances:
S Waveform quality (rho) should be w0.912 (–0.4dB).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Individual ATP Test Background Information
68P09258A31–A
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:
S Pilot Time Offset should be within v3 ms of the target PT
Offset (0 ms).
The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC
channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be
assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
Verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD
numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done by
verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to
10.2 $ 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures v –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
NOTE
Oct 2003
When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is an MCC8E
or MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or show marginal
performance. This is due to a timing mismatch that the LMF does not
address. Performing this test from the CBSC will not have this timing
problem.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-13
Individual ATP Test Background Information
68P09258A31–A
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, the
OCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC.
8.2 dB
Active channels
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
Indicating Failures
64
FW00283
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower Top
Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel
elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed
4-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Individual ATP Test Background Information
up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with
pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receive
circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that
results meet the following specification:
S FER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign
the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under
test. The test is then repeated.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
4-15
Generating an ATP Report
68P09258A31–A
Generating an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the
status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS
and includes the following for each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP
report for a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report
n Step
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station
pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to sort the report.
4-16
Action
– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the
Dismiss button.
– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired
file type in the picklist and click on the Save button.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Chapter 5
Prepare to Leave the Site
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-1
Updating Calibration Data Files
68P09258A31–A
Updating Calibration Data Files
Software Release caveats
With Software Release 2.16.1.x, the packet BTS will NOT detect a new
calibration file on the OMC–R. A manual workaround is available in
bulletin cdma_g_bts_059. This will be corrected in Software Release
2.16.3.
Software Release 2.16.3 will allow the user to load the calibration file
from the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then ftp the new
calibration file to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the user
to place the calibration file at the OMC–R.
Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC
After completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL file
information must be moved from the LMF Windows environment back
to the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detail
moving files from one environment to the other.
Copying CAL files from LMF to a Diskette
Follow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from an LMF
computer to a 3.5 diskette.
Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette
Step
Action
With Windows running on the LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:\.
Launch the Windows Explorer application program from the Start > Programs menu list.
Select the applicable :\).
With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in the home
directory by performing the following:
9a
– Type in dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key.
Where: # = BTS number for which the CAL file was created
NOTE
Other versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp (copy)
command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited out with a
Unix text editor.
10
Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the CAL files have been copied. Verify all CAL
files to be transferred appear in the displayed listing.
11
Type eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-3: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
5-4
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX
connectors on the top of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed
lines at the top of the frame.
CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the
correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause
system degradation of call processing.
NOTE
Each module or device can be in any state prior to downloading.
Each module or device will be in an OOS_RAM state after
downloading has completed.
– For all LMF commands, information in italics represents
valid ranges for that command field.
– Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.
Default values for other fields will be assumed.
– For more complete command examples (including system
response details), refer to the CDMA LMF User Guide.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification
Table 5-4 describes how to verify the current Span Framing Format and
Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards in all
C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be verified.
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with MGLI2 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-3 on page 3-13).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code
configuration (in bold type):
span view 
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED:
span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11 . .................................
3-40
NOTE
–
–
–
–
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the
correct choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Figure 5-1: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection
RS–232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
9–PIN TO 9– PIN
RS–232 CABLE
MMI SERIAL PORT
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÁÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÁÁ
Á
Á Á
FW00344
Set BTS Site Span Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations
loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match those in the
OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-3 on page 3-13).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
. . . continued on next page
5-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a – f run to the site:
span_config     
option#1 = the span to change (a – f)
option#2 = the span type (0 – 8):
0 – E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC–4)
1 – E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 – E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC–4, TS16)
3 – E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 – T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 – T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 – J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 – J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 – T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 – 7):
0 – T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 – T1_4 (T1,J1:393–524 feet)
2 – T1_4 (T1,J1:131–262 feet)
3 – E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 – T1_4 (T1,J1:0–131 feet)
5 – T1_4 (T1,J1:524–655 feet)
6 – T1_4 (T1,J1:262–393 feet)
7 – E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 – 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120–Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0–131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
span_config f 5 64 4 0
NOTE
Make sure that spans a – f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/GLI2 board MUST be reset and
re–loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-7
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next GLI2
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards.
Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
LMF Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMF
GUI session and remove the LMF computer.
Table 5-6: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF
Step
Action
! CAUTION
DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing the procedure indicated below.
Corrupted/lost data files may result, and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.
Log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on File in the LMF window menu bar and selecting
Logout and Exit from the pull–down list.
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows
message appears.
Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as required
for equipment transport.
5-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7
and Figure 5-2 as required.
Table 5-7: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.
If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pin
sub D connector.
NOTE
Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame
Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.
Figure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-9
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely
Devices in the BTS should not be left with data and code loaded from
the LMF. The configuration data and code loads used for normal
operation could be different from those stored in the LMF files. Perform
the procedure in Table 5-8 to reset all devices and initialize site remotely.
Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
Action
Terminate the LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.
Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.
– If BTS is configured for circuit operation, go to Step 4.
– If BTS is configured for packet operation, go to Step 5.
Circuit BTS Procedure:
4a
From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS reset.
or
At the BTS site:
– unseat one GLI card at a time and wait for 30 seconds;
– reseat the GLI and wait for it to complete its initialization (this takes about one minute);
– repeat for the second GLI.
4b
Depending on the number of installed operational GLI cards, perform one of the following:
– With fully redundant GLIs, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to run the ACTIVATE
command for the BTS.
– For a non–redundant GLI or a frame where the redundant GLI is not operational, contact the
OMC–R and request the operator:
S ACTIVATE the GLI to set the Nextload attribute for the GLI to the one for the current BSS
software version;
S Disable the GLI;
S Enable the GLI to allow the MM to load the software version specified by the Nextload
attribute;
S Once the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R and request the operator ACTIVATE the BTS.
– Once the GLI cards are loaded with the specified code version, the active GLI will verify and
update, as required, the RAM and, if it is necessary, ROM code loads for the installed CSM,
MCC, and BBX cards using the DLM.
. . . continued on next page
5-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
Action
Packet BTS procedure:
5a
From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS to the
required software version for the BSS. There are two types of PREACTIVATE load processes:
– Rolling Upgrade: This load process is only available when the BTS cards are populated for full
redundancy as applicable.
– Quick Reboot: This process is used when there is not full redundancy for the BTS cards. The
GLI3 will disable and reboot to the new load. This will cause all the other cards to go out of
service. Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new load and then
downloads the cards in the order which they establish communication with the GLI3 following
their reboot. The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.
After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R and confirm that the BTS is
under OMC–R control.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
5-11
Prepare to Leave the Site
68P09258A31–A
Notes
5-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Chapter 6
Basic Troubleshooting
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-1
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
68P09258A31–A
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
6-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: Installation
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
If the MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset the MGLI by re-seating it. If
this persists, install a known good MGLI card in the MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also
indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-4 on page 3-16).
If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-11 on page 3-34).
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-17).
Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-9 on page 3-33).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicable
GPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-25 or
Table 3-26 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment
Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-3
Troubleshooting: Installation
68P09258A31–A
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB box power and
retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications
analyzer communication failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
n Step
6-4
Action
Verify signal generator is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify cable connections as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIB
address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-25 or Table 3-26
and the GPIB Address section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment
Preparation section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box power
and retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: Download
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: Download
Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
n Step
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.
Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to the MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device.
The MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.
Reset the card by re-seating it.
If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat the card and try again.
If a BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Use the LMF
Status function to verify the load.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and Reset.
If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMF
Device > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.
10
If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flash
memory.
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
n Step
Oct 2003
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-5
Troubleshooting: Download
68P09258A31–A
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color
of the device changes to green once it is enabled.
The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:
S Enabled (green, INS)
S Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
S Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable
failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
n Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.
If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.
Miscellaneous Errors
Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous
failures.
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures
n Step
6-6
Action
If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-3 on page 3-13).
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.
The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)
and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8
For 1700 MHz:
Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show
“RES”.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-7
Troubleshooting: Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Cannot Load BLO
For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of
Chapter 3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.
Re-try the audit.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
6-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal
operation
Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Link
problem during normal operation.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)
n Step
Action
Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:
– TX mask
– TX rho
– TX code domain
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX mask
measurement failure.
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the
circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS
is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).
Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press 
and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized
before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-9
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
68P09258A31–A
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
6-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FER
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.
Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.
On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of
failure).
Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-11
Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may
be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for
repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field
returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload
fails.
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error
This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration
performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and
SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown
below) to function correctly.
CSM Kit
No.
Hardware
Configuration
CSM Slot
No.
Reference Source
Configuration
CDF Value
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
SGLN4132
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO
2 or 18
6-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Troubleshooting: CSM Check–list
68P09258A31–A
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the
accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system
time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one
satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four
satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,
verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-13
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Introduction
The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This
information allows the CFE to:
S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
S Isolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus
Connectors
The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus
from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basic
function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to all
other GLIs in the frame.
The ISB also provides the following functions:
S Span line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
S MMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.
S Interface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).
Span Line Connector
The 50–pin span line connector provides a primary and secondary (if
used) span line interface to each GLI in the C–CCP shelf. The span line
is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master GLI and also all the
BBX traffic.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution
Module Input/Output
The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz
reference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in the
backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on
the GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal
frequencies.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 volt or –48 volt input for use by the power supply
modules.
6-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCP
Power Modules convert +27 or –48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and
+5.0 Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. In the –48 V BTS, the
LPA power modules convert –48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.
GLI Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C–CCP backplane.
GLI 10Base–2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI and the other GLI, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
S RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
C–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
S A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
S Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output
is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.
S TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to
the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
NOTE
Oct 2003
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before
replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-15
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
Digital Control Problems
No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control via
LMF failure.
Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
n Step
Action
Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)
Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLI
control failures.
Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)
Step
Action
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection and
damage.
Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
6-16
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
No AMR Control (MGLI good)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control
failure when the MGLI control is good.
Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control over
Co–located GLIs)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in
the shelf failure.
Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLIs
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic
failure.
Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.
Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-17
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements
Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements
failure.
Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements
Step
Action
Verify MCC channel elements (CEs) are correct. MCCTYPE codes are: MCC8E=0, MCC24E=2,
MCC–1X=3.
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.
– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
If no CEs on any MCC:
– Verify clock reference to CIO.
6-18
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
DC Power Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to power supply module failure.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the
BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second
person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,
and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.
Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane.
– If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.
Replace the power supply module with a known good module.
If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has
occurred.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-19
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
68P09258A31–A
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI,
BBX, or Switchboard
Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal
routing problems.
Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected board
slots.
Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
6-20
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the
state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and LPA
power converters.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-21
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09258A31–A
CSM LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
S Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in
DUMB mode.
S Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
S Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
S Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
S Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
. . . continued on next page
6-22
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The
RS–232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in
the development or factory environment, but may be used in the
field for debug/maintenance purposes.
GLI2 LED Status Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:
ACTIVE
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER
S Solid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
S Off – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM
S Solid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
S Off – No Alarm.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-23
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09258A31–A
STATUS
S Flashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
S On – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
S Off – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS
S Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
S Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton
causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.
The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended
to be used primarily in the development or factory environment
but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit
board mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front
edge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet
cabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNC
connectors.
6-24
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09258A31–A
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel
LED
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS LED
RESET
ALARM
RESET
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
SPANS
ALARM LED
ALARM
SPANS LED
SPANS
MASTER
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
MMI
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
MASTER
MASTER LED
OPERATING STATUS
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns
OFF.
SLOW
GREEN
– when
INS (in-service)
All functions
on the
GLI2the
areGLI2
resetiswhen
pressing and
releasing the switch.
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns
OFF.
SLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)
OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN – operating normally
YELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is
receiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an
alarm state
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The
card in the top shelf is designated by hardware as the
active card; the card in the bottom shelf is in the standby
mode.
ON – operating normally in active mode
OFF – operating normally in standby mode
MMI PORT
An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for
CONNECTOR use as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a
maximum of 115,200 baud communications.
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The
redundant card toggles automatically if the active card is
removed
or fails
ON
– active
card operating normally
OFF – standby card operating normally
FW00225
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-25
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09258A31–A
GLI3 Front Panel
Figure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel.
Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel
LED
BPR A
BPR B
AUX
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
ACT
6-26
STA
ACTIVE
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns
OFF
SLOW
– when
the GLI3
INS (in-service)
Shows GREEN
the operating
status
of theisredundant
cards. The
redundant card toggles automatically if the active card is
removed
or fails
ON
– active
card operating normally
OFF – standby card operating normally
Reset Switch
SPAN
STATUS
Dual 100BASE–T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
MMI
ALARM
RESET
MMI
100BASE–T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
GLI
Span
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on
the GLI3.
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns
OFF
SLOW
GREEN
– when down,
the GLI3
is INS (in-service)
OFF – card
is powered
in initialization,
or in standby
GREEN – operating normally
YELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is
receiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an
alarm state
An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for
use as an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a
maximum of 115,200 baud communications.
100BASE–T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
AUX
ALARM
Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal
computer with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection
of ethernet “sniffer” when the ethernet switch is properly
configured for port monitoring.
Supports the cross–coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI
using a double crossover cable.
BPR B
RESET
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as
an ethernet client.
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as
an ethernet client.
BPR A
GLI
OPERATING STATUS
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
BBX LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
S Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
S Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
S Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
S Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
S Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
S Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC LED Status Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
S RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
S Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
S Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
S The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
S The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
68P09258A31–A
Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
LED
COLOR
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up and during
failure conditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE
RED
GREEN
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING – Card is
code-loaded but not enabled
SLOW BLINKING – Card is not
code-loaded
ON – card is code-loaded and enabled
ON(INS_ACTIVE)
– fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green)
– CHI bus inactive on power-up
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI
connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as
follows:
S GREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
S Flashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
6-28
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control Link)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link
failure.
Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
n Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown in
Figure 6-5 or Figure 6-6.
Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon.
Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI>
prompt is obtained.
At the GLI> prompt, enter:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
S Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
S Listen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu.
If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole C–CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-29
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
RESET
Pushbutton
GLI
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
To MMI port
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232
CABLE
COM1 or COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
ti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw
6-30
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Figure 6-6: GLI3 Board MMI Connection Detail
BPR A
BPR B
100BASE–T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
AUX
100BASE–T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
GLI
Dual 100BASE–T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
Reset Switch
SPAN
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
MMI
To MMI port
ALARM
RESET
GLI3
ACT
STA
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
RS–232
CABLE
COM1 or COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
REF ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-31
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Set BTS Site Span Configuration
Table 6-26 describes how to set the span parameter configuration.
NOTE
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations
loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match those in the
OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-5.
If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate one
by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.
At the GLI> prompt, enter:
config ni format


The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option
Next available options:
LIST – Option : Span Option
E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
no TS16
E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
TS16
E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS
T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default
J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.
To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as
shown in the following example:
> T1_2 
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI2>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI2>
. . . continued on next page
6-32
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni linkspeed 
The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
Next available options:
LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed
56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.
To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),
as shown in the following example:
>64K 
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI2>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed.
GLI2>
It will take effect after the next reset.
If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni equal
The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal
Next available options:
LIST –
span : Span
a : Span
b : Span
c : Span
d : Span
e : Span
f : Span
span equal
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-33
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
10
Action
At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in
the following example:
>a
The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal
Next available options:
LIST –
equal : Span Equalization
0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1)
1 : 132–262 feet
2 : 263–393 feet
3 : 394–524 feet
4 : 525–655 feet
5 : LONG HAUL
6 : 75 OHM
7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)
11
At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the
following example:
>0
The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
> 0
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI2>
12
Repeat Steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.
NOTE
– After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal
commands, the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take
effect.
– Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and
linkspeed used at the site.
13
Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.
14
Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are as
required:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – 0–131 feet
Span B – 0–131 feet
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: 64K
Currently, the link is running at 64K
The actual rate is 0
. . . continued on next page
6-34
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
15
If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it and
repeat Steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.
16
Return to Step 6 of Table 6-25.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
6-35
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
68P09258A31–A
Notes
6-36
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
A
Appendix A
Data Sheets
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-1
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Verification of Test Equipment Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Deliveries
Per established procedures
−
Floor Plan
Verified
−
−
−
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
−
−
Factory Data:
BBX
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
Site Temperature
−
Dress Covers/Brackets
Comments
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Shelf ID Dip Switches
Per site equipage
−
BBX Jumpers
Verified per procedure
−
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-3
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests
Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist
OK
−
Parameter
Specification
Pre–power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
−
−
−
−
−
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
−
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
−
Initial power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
−
−
−
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
General Optimization Checklist
Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
−
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
−
−
−
−
−
−
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Create master–bts–cdma directory
Download device loads
Moving/Linking files
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
−
−
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Download/Enable MGLIs
Download/Enable GLIs
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Download
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs
Download BBXs
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
−
Test Set Calibration
per procedure
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-5
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
−
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
−
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in ms
and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
−
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
−
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
−
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment.
−
SN ratio is > 8 dB
−
LFR Task State: lfr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
−
Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
as specified in site
documentation
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-7
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter
OK
LPA
−
Comments
CARRIER
Specification
4:1 & 2:1
3–Sector
2:1
6–Sector
Dual BP
3–Sector
Dual BP
6–Sector
1A
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1B
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1C
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1D
C1
C1
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
2A
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2B
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2C
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2D
C2
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
3A
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
3B
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
3C
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
3D
C3
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
4A
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4B
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4C
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4D
C4
C2
No Alarms
A-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
LPA Convergence
Table A-9: LPA Convergence
OK
Parameter
−
LPA # Converged
1A
−
1B
−
1C
−
1D
−
2A
−
2B
−
2C
−
2D
−
3A
−
3B
−
3C
−
3D
−
4A
−
4B
−
4C
−
4D
Oct 2003
Specification
Data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-9
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 1–C, and 2– and 4–C Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
A-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 1–C, and 2– and 4–C Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
−
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 2–C Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-11
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 2–C Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
−
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
3–Carrier Adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
. . . continued on next page
A-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-13
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3–S: 3– or 4–C Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–S: 1–C, 2–C Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
TX Bay
y Level Offset = 42 dB ((typical),
yp ),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset = 42 dB ((typical),
yp ),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-15
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–S: 1–C, 2–C Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5
dB)) for gain
g set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+0.5
dB)) for gain
g set resolution
post calibration
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A-16
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
SIF: Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
MGLI redundancy test
Verify per procedure
−
GLI redundancy test
Verify per procedure
−
Power supply/converter
redundancy
Verify per procedure
−
Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
CSM, GPS, & LFR
redundancy/alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
LPA redundancy test
Verify per procedure
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-17
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
68P09258A31–A
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
AMR Verification
Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM A”
(numbers 1 –18)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
−
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM B”
(numbers 19 –36)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Data
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A-18
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Site Serial Number Check List
68P09258A31–A
Site Serial Number Check List
C–CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C–CCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI–1
GLI–2
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
BBX–r
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
MCC–4
MCC–5
MCC–6
MCC–7
MCC–8
MCC–9
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
A-19
Site Serial Number Check List
68P09258A31–A
MCC–10
MCC–11
MCC–12
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
PS–3
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 2B
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
LPA 4A
LPA 4B
LPA 4C
LPA 4D
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only)
AMR
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS 9
A-20
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
B
Appendix B
PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register
Programming Information
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-1
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding
I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table B-1.
PN Offset Usage
Only the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine
the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be
done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”
when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj
value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately
20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97
specifications.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
NOTE
B-2
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL or
HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,
convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal before comparing
them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
(Hex.)
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-3
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
(Hex.)
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
. . . continued on next page
B-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
(Hex.)
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-5
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
(Hex.)
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
. . . continued on next page
B-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
(Hex.)
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-7
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
(Hex.)
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
. . . continued on next page
B-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
(Hex.)
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-9
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
(Hex.)
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
. . . continued on next page
B-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
(Hex.)
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-11
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
(Hex.)
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
. . . continued on next page
B-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
Oct 2003
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
(Hex.)
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
B-13
PN Offset Programming Information
68P09258A31–A
Notes
B-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
C
Appendix C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
C-1
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
68P09258A31–A
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
NOTE
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in the
tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associated
with it is replaced.
BTS Frame
Table C-1: When RF Optimization is required on the BTS
Item Replaced
Optimize:
C–CCP Shelf
All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(C–CCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card
The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.
BBX board
RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP
shelf / BBX board.
CIO Card
All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any LPA Module
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Backplane
The affected sector TX path.
LPA Filter
The affected sector TX path.
Ancillary Frame
Item Replaced
C-2
Optimize:
Directional Coupler
All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter
All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Any RFDS component
or TSU.
The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD).
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
68P09258A31–A
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Ancillary frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables
The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to ancillary frame
(TX) cables
The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
NOTE
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line is
indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a guideline
ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with
the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which test
equipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will be
required before performing the Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed
that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector
I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a
new installation.
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, it
would be identified by re–running the RX and TX calibration
audit command.
When the CIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
C-3
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
68P09258A31–A
CSM
LFR/HSO
GPS
GLI
LPA Trunking Backplane
LPA
LPA Bandpass Filter
Power Supply Modules
Switch Card
RFDS
MCC
2-15 Initial Power-up
BBX
Table 2-7
C–CCP Backplane
2-6 DC Power Pre-Test Physical
2-14 Inspect
MPC/EMPC
Table 2-2
Table 2-5
TX Cables
2-3
RX Filter
Initial Boards/Modules Install,
Prelimnary Operations, CDF
Site Equipage; etc.
Table 2-1
RX Cables
Description
CIO
page
Directional Coupler (TX)
Doc
Tbl
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
**
**
Table 3-11 3-34 Ping the Processors
Table 3-13 3-38 Download/Enable MGLIs
Table 3-13 3-38 Download/Enable GLIs
Table 3-14 3-39 Download CSMs
Table 3-14 3-39
Download MCCs
Table 3-14 3-39 Download BBXs
Table 3-16 3-41 Enable CSMs
Table 3-17 3-42 Enable MCCs
GPS Initialization /
Table 3-20 3-49 Verification
LFR Initialization /
Table 3-21 3-53 Verification
Table 3-22 3-55 HSO Initialization/Verification
Required
** Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. If power to
the C–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
C-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
68P09258A31–A
4-9
Spectral Purity TX Mask ATP
Table 4-1
4-9
Waveform Quality (rho) ATP
Table 4-1
4-9
Pilot Time Offset ATP
Table 4-1
4-9
Code Domain Power / Noise
Floor
Table 4-1
4-9
FER Test
RFDS
LPA Bandpass Filter
Switch Card
LPA
Power Supply Modules
LPA Trunking Backplane
RFDS Path Calibration should be performed at initial BTS installation AND after replacement of the RFDS FRU.
RFDS Path Calibration is NOT required for other FRU replacement but may be used as an additional fault isolation tool.
Table 4-1
GLI
RFDS Path Calibration
Procedure (see Note [)
GPS
Table 3-48 3-107
LFR/HSO
CSM
MCC
Table 3-39 3-96 TX Path Calibration Audit
BBX
C–CCP Backplane
MPC/EMPC
Table 3-38 3-94 Download Offsets to BBX
CIO
Description
TX Cables
page
RX Cables
Directional Coupler (TX)
Table 3-37 3-92 TX Path Calibration
Doc
Tbl
RX Filter
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Perform if necessary for additional fault isolation, repair assurance, or site certification.
Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C–CCP cage.
Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C–CCP cage.
Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.
Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and sector TX
paths.)
Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and sector RX
paths.)
Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers.)
Perform with redundant BBX for all sectors on all carriers.
Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
C-5
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
68P09258A31–A
Notes
C-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix D
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
D-1
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
68P09258A31–A
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Usage & Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF
output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.
The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have
been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier
with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain
is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate
exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output
range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
. . . continued on next page
D-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
68P09258A31–A
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
–
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
–
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
–
–
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
–
–
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
–
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
D-3
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
68P09258A31–A
Notes
D-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix E
CDMA Operating Frequency
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
E-1
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
68P09258A31–A
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
. . . continued on next page
E-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies
Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
S RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 80 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25
0019
1931.25
1851.25
50
0032
1932.50
1852.50
75
004B
1933.75
1853.75
100
0064
1935.00
1855.00
125
007D
1936.25
1856.25
150
0096
1937.50
1857.50
175
00AF
1938.75
1858.75
200
00C8
1940.00
1860.00
225
00E1
1941.25
1861.25
250
00FA
1942.50
1862.50
275
0113
1943.75
1863.75
300
012C
1945.00
1865.00
325
0145
1946.25
1866.25
350
015E
1947.50
1867.50
375
0177
1948.75
1868.75
400
0190
1950.00
1870.00
425
01A9
1951.25
1871.25
450
01C2
1952.50
1872.50
475
01DB
1953.75
1873.75
500
01F4
1955.00
1875.00
525
020D
1956.25
1876.25
550
0226
1957.50
1877.50
575
023F
1958.75
1878.75
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
E-3
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
68P09258A31–A
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
600
0258
1960.00
1880.00
625
0271
1961.25
1881.25
650
028A
1962.50
1882.50
675
02A3
1963.75
1883.75
700
02BC
1965.00
1885.00
725
02D5
1966.25
1886.25
750
02EE
1967.50
1887.50
775
0307
1968.75
1888.75
800
0320
1970.00
1890.00
825
0339
1971.25
1891.25
850
0352
1972.50
1892.50
875
036B
1973.75
1893.75
900
0384
1975.00
1895.00
925
039D
1976.25
1896.25
950
03B6
1977.50
1897.50
975
03CF
1978.75
1898.75
1000
03E8
1980.00
1900.00
1025
0401
1981.25
1901.25
1050
041A
1982.50
1902.50
1075
0433
1983.75
1903.75
1100
044C
1985.00
1905.00
1125
0465
1986.25
1906.25
1150
047E
1987.50
1807.50
1175
0497
1988.75
1908.75
E-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
68P09258A31–A
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
ËË
848.970
893.970
777

739

ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
799

891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
716

717

694

ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
689

844.980
845.010
889.980
890.010
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
644

356

ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
666

667

879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333

334

311

825.000
825.030
1023

1

824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
1013
RX FREQ
(MHz)
991

TX FREQ
(MHz)
870.000
870.030
869.040
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies
Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
S Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
S RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0001
870.0300
825.0300
25
0019
870.7500
825.7500
50
0032
871.5000
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
826.5000
. . . continued on next page
E-5
Operating Frequency – North American PCS Bands
68P09258A31–A
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
E-6
03FF
870.0000
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
825.0000
Oct 2003
Operating Frequency – Korean Bands
68P09258A31–A
Operating Frequency – Korean Bands
1700 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequency
spectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,
75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.
Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum
CHANNEL
25
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1751.25 1841.25
575
Oct 2003
1778.75
1868.75
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
E-7
Operating Frequency – Korean Bands
68P09258A31–A
Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies
Center frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:
Direction
Formula
Example
TX
1840 + (0.05 * Channel#)
Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25
RX
1750 + (0.05 * Channel#)
Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25
– Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system
frequency plan.
– Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard
band on both sides of the carrier
– Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA
carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to
center).
Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0019
1841.25
1751.25
50
0032
1842.50
1752.50
75
004B
1843.75
1753.75
100
0064
1845.00
1755.00
125
007D
1846.25
1756.25
150
0096
1847.50
1757.50
175
00AF
1848.75
1758.75
200
00C8
1850.00
1760.00
225
00E1
1851.25
1761.25
250
00FA
1852.50
1762.50
275
0113
1853.75
1763.75
300
012C
1855.00
1765.00
325
0145
1856.25
1766.25
350
015E
1857.50
1767.50
375
0177
1858.75
1768.75
400
0190
1860.00
1770.00
425
01A9
1861.25
1771.25
450
01C2
1862.50
1772.50
475
01DB
1863.75
1773.75
500
01F4
1865.00
1775.00
525
020D
1866.25
1776.25
550
0226
1867.50
1777.50
575
023F
1868.75
1778.75
25
E-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix F
Test Equipment Preparation
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation
68P09258A31–A
Test Equipment Preparation
Purpose
This appendix provides information on pre–testing set–up for the
following test equipment items (not required for the Cybertest test set):
Agilent E7495A test equipment setup
Agilent E4406A transmitter test set
Agilent E4432B signal generator
Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer
Advantest R3562 signal generator
Agilent 8935 analyzer (formerly HP 8935)
HP 8921 with PCS interface analyzer
Advantest R3465 analyzer
Motorola CyberTest
HP 437 power meter
Gigatronics 8541C power meter
GPIB adapter
Pre–testing set–up information covered includes verification and setting
GPIB addresses, inter–unit cabling, connectivity testing, pre–test control
settings, and equipment calibration for items which are not calibrated
with the Calibrate Test Equipment function of the LMF.
The following procedures cover verification and changing GPIB
addresses for the various items of CDMA test equipment supported by
the LMF.
F-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Preparation
68P09258A31–A
Agilent R7495A Test Equipment Setup
This test equipment requires a warm-up period of at least 30 minutes
before BTS testing or calibration begins.
Using the Agilent E7495A with the LMF
The Agilent E7495A does not require the use of the 19MHz frequency
reference; if connected, it will be ignored. The Even Sec SYNC
connection is required.
The Agilent E7495A signal generator is only calibrated down to –80db.
In order to achieve accurate FER testing, be sure the RX setup includes
at least 40db of attenuation. This will ensure the signal generator will
output sufficient power to operate in the calibrated range.
Set the IP Address as described in Table F-1.
Table F-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A test set
n Step
Action
Use the System Button > Controls >IPAdmin to set an
IP address on the E7495A as 128.0.0.49, and Netmask to
255.255.255.128.
Connections
It is recommended that you use a hub with BNC and RJ–45 connections.
[Suggested models: Netgear model EN104 (4 port) or EN108 (8 port).
Do NOT use model numbers ending with “TP”; those have no BNC
connectors.]
The LMF will connect to the hub which in turn is connected to the BTS
and to the Agilent E7495A.
Agilent E7495A to Hub – This is an Ethernet cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45.
LMF to Hub – Use one of the following cables to connect the LMF to
the Hub:
– Ethernet cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45 (be sure that the LAN card is set for
either AUTO or to use the RJ–45 only).
– Coax cable between LAN card and Hub. (Use a “T” on the hub and
connect a cable between the other end of the “T” and the BTS LAN
connection).
Hub to BTS – Use BNC “T” connector on the hub. [If your hub doesn’t
have BNC ports, use a BNC to UTP adapter.]
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-3
Test Equipment Preparation
68P09258A31–A
Detecting Test Equipment
Check that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. Agilent
equipment must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Then perform the
procedures described in Table F-2.
Table F-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test Equipment
n Step
Action
Click the Tools Menu.
Choose Options.
Check Agilent E7495A option in non–GPIB Test Equipment and enter its IP number.
Click Apply and wait a moment.
Click Dismiss.
Power Sensor Calibration
Table F-3 describes the E7495A Power Sensor Calibration.
Table F-3: E7495A Power Sensor Calibration
n Step
F-4
Action
Display the power meter screen.
Zero the power meter. Make sure you are connected as shown in Figure F-1.
– Press the Zero softkey.
– Press the Continue softkey.
Calibrate the power meter:
– Press Ref CF.
– Enter the reference cal factor, reading it off the label on the power sensor head.
– Press Calibrate.
– Connect the power sensor (see Figure F-2).
– Press Continue.
– Press Cal Factor.
– Enter the cal factor from the label on the power sensor head. Select a cal factor that’s within
the operating frequency of the base station.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Preparation
68P09258A31–A
Figure F-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration connection
Power REF
50 MHz
GPIO
Serial 1
Port 2
RF In
Sensor
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
Serial 2
POWER SENSOR
NOT CONNECTED
Figure F-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration connection
POWER SENSOR
CONNECTED
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Power REF
50 MHz
Serial 1
Sensor
Serial 2
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
Cable Calibration
Follow the directions in the WinLMF program to calibrate cables.
– Calibrate the short cable (see Figure 3-15 on page 3-64) and two 10
dB pads to get a base line and then calibrate the TX and RX setup.
Since you need at least 40 dB of loss when doing the FER test, the
setup for RX is the same as TX.
ATP Setup
TX Path Calibration setup is shown in Test Equipment Setup (see
Figure 3-18 on page 3-67).
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-5
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-3 and follow the procedure in Table F-4 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.
Figure F-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Active Function Area
Softkey Label Display Area
System Key
Bk Sp Key
Enter Key
Softkey Buttons
Data Entry Keypad
ti-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftw
Table F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey button. In the on–screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will
be displayed followed by the current GPIB address.
3b
On front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of 18.
– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
– Characters typed with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Function
Area.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press Bk Sp key to delete one character at a time.
3c
F-6
Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.
– The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.
– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-4 and follow the procedure in Table F-5 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.
Figure F-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Active Entry
Area
Softkey Label
Display Area
Utility
Key
Softkey
Buttons
Numeric
Keypad
Backspace
Key
Table F-5: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey button.
– The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.
– In the on–screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current GPIB
address.
3b
On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.
– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
– Characters typed on the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at
a time.
3c
Oct 2003
Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.
– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-7
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-5 and perform the procedure in Table F-6 to verify
and, if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB
address.
Figure F-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Softkey Lable
Display Area
Softkey
Buttons
on
REMOTE
LED
LCL Key
CONFIG
Key
Keypad
BS
Key
ENTR
Key
Table F-6: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Step
Action
If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.
– The LED extinguishes.
Press the CONFIG key.
– CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument display.
– The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey. A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display
showing the current GPIB address.
3b
Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.
– Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address entry
window.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one
character at a time.
3c
F-8
Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to set the new GPIB address.
– The GPIB Address entry window closes.
– The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address
Set the GP–IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562
signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure F-6.
Figure F-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting
GPIB Address set to “1”
GP–IP ADDRESS
5 4 3 2 1
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-9
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test Set GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-7 and follow the procedure in Table F-7 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent 8935 GPIB address.
Figure F-7: Agilent 8935 Test Set
Preset
Local
Inst Config
Shift
NOTE
Cursor Control
FW00885
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-7: Verify and/or Change Agilent 8935 (formerly HP 8935) GPIB Address
Step
Action
NOTE
The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or no device on the GPIB will be
accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the Agilent 8935.
– The current HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
2a
– Press Shift and Inst Config.
2b
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP–IB Adrs field.
2c
– Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.
2d
– Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.
2e
– Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.
F-10
Press Preset to return to normal operation.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-8 and follow the procedure in Table F-8 to verify and,
if necessary, change the HP 8921A HP 83236A GPIB addresses.
Figure F-8: HP 8921A and HP 83236A/B
Local
Preset
Cursor Control
Shift
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP 8921A and HP 83236A GPIB Addresses
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP 8921A.
– The current HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current HP–IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
2a
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.
2b
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the
field.
2c
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.
2d
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP–IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the
address.
2e
– Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.
Oct 2003
To set the HP 83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the DIP switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-11
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-9 and follow the procedure in Table F-9 to verify and,
if necessary, change the GPIB address for the Advantest R3465.
Figure F-9: R3465 Communications Test Set
GPIB and others
REF UNLOCK
BNC
“T”
EVEN
SEC/SYNC IN
CDMA
TIME BASE IN
POWER
OFF
ON
Vernier
Knob
LCL
Shift
NOTE
Preset
REF FW00337
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following:
1a
– Press SHIFT then PRESET.
1b
– Press LCL.
1c
– Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
2a
– Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.
2b
– Press the vernier knob to set the address.
F-12
To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table F-10 to verify and, if necessary, change the
GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address
requires the following items:
NOTE
Motorola CyberTest communications analyzer.
Computer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95.
Motorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”.
Parallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest).
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address
Step
Action
On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAME
application.
In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.
CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then will
open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the following
procedure to change it:
3a
– Use the up or down increment arrows or double–click in the field and type the number to set the
address to 18.
3b
– Click on the OK button.
–– The new address will be written to the CyberTest through the parallel port and saved.
Oct 2003
Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3.
– The new address should now appear in the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-13
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-10 and follow the steps in Table F-11 to verify and, if
necessary, change the HP 437 GPIB address.
Figure F-10: HP 437 Power Meter
PRESET
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
ENTER
NOTE
REF FW00308
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-11: Verify and/or Change HP 437 Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
Press Shift and PRESET.
Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP–IB ADRS and press ENTER.
The HP–IB address is displayed.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
– Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP–IB ADRS to 13.
– Press ENTER to set the address.
Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.
F-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Refer to Figure F-11 and follow the steps in Table F-12 to verify and, if
necessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.
Figure F-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
MENU
NOTE
ENTER
ARROW
KEYS
REF FW00564
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
Table F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
Press MENU.
Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.
Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.
The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.
If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:
Use the a ’ arrow keys as required to select MODE.
Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.
If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
Use the ’ arrow key to select ADDRESS.
Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.
Press ENTER to return to normal operation.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-15
Verifying and Setting GPIB Address
68P09258A31–A
RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter
Be sure that the RS–232 GPIB interface adapter DIP switches are set as
shown in Figure F-12.
Figure F-12: RS232 GPIB Interface Adapter
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
F-16
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Test Equipment Set-up
Purpose
This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in
Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along
with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer.
Equipment Warm up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to
performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS
site stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Time
spent running initial power-up, hardware/
firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up time.)
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has
been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
could introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test
equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the
overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been
allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for
preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration
procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-17
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
HP8921A System Connectivity Test
Follow the steps in Table F-13 to verify that the connections between the
PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The
software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
NOTE
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,
from the system before running the connectivity software.
Table F-13: System Connectivity
Step
Action
NOTE
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.
The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.
When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]
pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
F-18
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236)
NOTE
This calibration method must be executed with great care. Some
losses are measured close to the minimum limit of the power
meter sensor (–30 dBm).
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
S Test equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Refer to Figure F-13 for location of the components on the PCS
Interface and Communications Test Set.
Test Equipment Set-up
Perform the procedure in Table F-14 to calibrate the test equipment
using the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-13).
Press the Preset pushbutton.
Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
Set RF Generator level:
– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
– Select User Defined Frequency.
– Go Back to Previous Menu.
– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-19
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level
(1850 – 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 – 1780 for 1.7 GHz).
– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13
Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14
On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15
Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16
Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17
Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
NOTE
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18
Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-13,
Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
S Example:
(A) Test Cable(s)
(B) 20 dB Attenuator =
(B) Directional Coupler =
–1.4 dB
–20.1 dB
–29.8 dB
19
After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
S Example:
Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21
Select Continue (K2).
22
Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
. . . continued on next page
F-20
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step
Action
23
Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24
Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
S Verify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
–
–
–
–
under To Screen, select More
select IO CONFIG
Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
set Mode to Talk&Lstn
S Verify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25
Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-21
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Figure F-13: Calibrating Test Setup Components
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
(B)
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-22
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00292
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing
Follow the procedure in Table F-15 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box
for manual testing.
Table F-15: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing
n Step
Action
NOTE
Verify GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.
Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)
screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel Number and select.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).
– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.
NOTE
If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.
S Set RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor
Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm
S Continue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).
Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor.
Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:
– Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Select Quit, then select Yes.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-23
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Perform the procedure in Table F-16 to calibrate the test cable setup
using the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and
calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-16: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
NOTE
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Select the Setup CRT menu key.
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters:
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default.
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key.
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
16
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
. . . continued on next page
F-24
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Table F-16: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
NOTE
The Power Meter sensor lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-14,
“Setups A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each
connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= –29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area.
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency.
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
F-25
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Figure F-14: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
F-26
FW00320
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)
The Agilent E4406A requires pre–calibration actions or calibration
verification that are not supported by the LMF. Follow the procedure in
Table F-17 and refer to Figure F-15 to perform the Agilent E4406A
self–alignment (calibration).
Table F-17: Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration)
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
Press the Align All Now softkey button.
– All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.
– The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.
– The alignment will take less than one minute.
Figure F-15: Agilent E4406A Self–alignment
Softkey Label
Display Area
System
Key
Softkey
Buttons
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
ti-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftw
F-27
Test Equipment Set-up
68P09258A31–A
Notes
F-28
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix G
Download ROM Code
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
G-1
Download ROM Code
68P09258A31–A
Download ROM Code
Download ROM Code
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–level
RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedure
includes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM code
download.
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file
must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to
download ROM code.
Prerequisite
S ROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.
CAUTION
The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be the
same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devices in the
BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This procedure should
only be used to upgrade replacement devices for a BTS and it
should not be used to upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is
to be upgraded from one R–level to another, the optimization
and ATP procedures must first be performed with the BTS in the
original configuration. The upgrade should then be done by the
CBSC.
Table G-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
Click on the device to be downloaded.
NOTE
More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to
be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull–down menu, select the device item that applies.
Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Status menu item.
A status report window appears.
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in
the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file
can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.
NOTE
ROM code is automatically selected for download from the :\\version folder>\ specified by the NextLoad property in
the bts–#.cdf file. To check the value of the NextLoad property, click on Util > Examine >
Display Nextload. A pop–up message will show the value of the NextLoad.
. . . continued on next page
G-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Download ROM Code
68P09258A31–A
Table G-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
From the BTS menu bar Device pull–down menus, select Download > ROM.
– If the file matching the Hardware Binary Type of the device is found in the code folder, a status
report shows the result of the download. Proceed to Step 12.
– If a file selection window appears, select the ROM code file manually.
Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.
Double–click on the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.
! CAUTION
A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The
hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results
can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong
binary type is downloaded.
10
11
Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).
The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.
Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604
for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
Click on the Load button.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform
steps 6 through 11 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.
12
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
13
Click on the Util menu.
14
Select the Tools menu item.
15
Click on the Update NextLoad>CDMA menu item.
16
Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.
17
18
Click on the Save button.
A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
19
Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.
20
Click on the Device menu.
21
Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the
Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.
22
Oct 2003
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be
INS (green).
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
G-3
Download ROM Code
68P09258A31–A
Table G-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
23
Click on the device that was downloaded.
24
Click on the Device menu.
25
Click on the Status menu item.
Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
26
G-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix H
In–Service Calibration
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-1
Introduction
68P09258A31–A
Introduction
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple
carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows
you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and
recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a
maintenance window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4–to–1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be
calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain
in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test
equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the
overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been
allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has
been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
could introduce measurement errors, causing incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
H-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Power Delta Calibration
Power Delta Calibration Introduction
The In–service calibration procedure has several differences from a
normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are
broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power
during In–service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A
spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less
accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for
the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration
Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
In–Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has
been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
NOTE
This procedure requires two HP8921As.
Table H-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure H-1).
Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Generator
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
Oct 2003
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure H-2).
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-3
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Analyzer Direction to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
10
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
11
Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
12
Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-5).
Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437B
HP 8921A
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX
OUT
Short RF Cable
H-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
FW00801
Oct 2003
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Figure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A
Source HP8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00802
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table H-2 to perform the Advantest R3465
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
On the Advantest R3465:
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF. If not, press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
On the HP 437 Power Meter:
10
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor
(see Figure H-3).
12
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-5
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
13
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15
Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port (see Figure H-4).
16
Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17
Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18
Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19
Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
20
Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21
Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22
Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24
Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
25
Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26
Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27
Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28
Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29
Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
30
Press the return CRT menu key.
31
Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32
Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33
Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34
Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
35
Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36
Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37
Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38
Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39
Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.
. . . continued on next page
H-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
40
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-5).
Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437B
Advantest
RF OUT
R3561L
Power
Sensor
HP437B
Short RF Cable
SENSOR
FW00803
Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465
RF OUT
R3561L
R3465
Short RF Cable
INPUT
FW00804
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-7
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table H-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
Table H-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure H-5).
Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Gen
– Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
– CW RF Path to IQ
– Output Port to Dupl
– Data Source to Random
– Amplitude to 0 dBm
Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.
Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port
(see Figure H-6).
Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.
Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:
– Measure mode to CDMA Anl
– Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
– Input Attenuation to 0 dB
– Input port to RF–IN
– Gain to Auto
– Anl Dir to Fwd
Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.
10
Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
11
Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result
B ________________________.
12
Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.
. . . continued on next page
H-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
13
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table H-5).
Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP437B
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP437B
SENSOR
Power
Sensor
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
FW00805
Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP8935
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
Short RF Cable
Oct 2003
FW00806
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-9
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration
The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test
equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X as
well as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is
performed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the
reference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset
value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.
Follow the procedure in Table H-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A
Power Delta Calibration procedure.
Table H-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the
“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812T
Optimization/ATP manual.
Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
NOTE
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power
sensor (see Figure H-7).
Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:
– Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.
– Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric
keypad.
– Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured (for
example, MHz).
– Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).
– Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the
RF INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure H-8).
. . . continued on next page
H-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
NOTE
Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following
steps.
Set the E4406A as follows:
– Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured.
– Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne.
– Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum.
– Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency.
– Using the numeric keypad. enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated.
– Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured (for example, MHz).
– Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten.
– Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.
– Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile.
– Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.
– Using the soft keys, select Base.
– Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.
– Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power.
On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
10
Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as
result B____________________.
11
On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.
– Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.
12
Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Agilent measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see step 4 in
Table H-5).
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-11
Power Delta Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437
AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A
HP437B
SENSOR
RF OUTPUT
Power
Sensor
Short RF Cable
FW00858
Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A
AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A
RF OUTPUT
Short RF
Cable
RF INPUT
FW00859
H-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
In–Service Calibration
CAUTION
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. The
system has no safe–guards to stop you from doing something
that will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this
procedure during a maintenance window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise the
entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardware
when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
Prerequisites
S Expansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
S The expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.
S The site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.
S The LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
CAUTION
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those you
are working on. Downloading code or data to other cards will
take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers
on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the
site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
The BTS–#.cdf, CBSC–#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS must
have come from the CBSC.
S Test equipment has been configured per Figure H-9 and Figure H-10.
S An RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.
S Test equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
S A short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
S The Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table H-1,
Table H-2, or Table H-3).
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-13
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Figure H-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
RX
(FOR 800 MHZ)
TEST
OUT
CABLE
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
DUPLEX OUT
ANTENNA
TX
TEST
CABLE
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF IN/OUT
RX
TEST
CABLE
Communicat
ions test set
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
GPIB ADRS
CSM
LAN
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
H-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Figure H-10: IS–95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
RX
TEST
CABLE
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
ANTENNA
RF IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
BNC
“T”
EXT TRIG IN
RF OUT
NOTE:
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
Communicat
ions test set
OUT
EXT
REF
IN
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
BNC
“T”
sIGNAL
GENER
ATOR
GPIB
CABLE
TX
CABLE
RX
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
RF
OUTPUT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
19.6608
MHZ
CLOCK
SYNC
MONITOR
RF
INPUT
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
TO 10 MHZ IN
(EXT REF IN)
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
ON
GPIB ADRS
CSM
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
LAN
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
BNC
“T”
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
Oct 2003
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00759
H-15
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Follow the procedure in Table H-5 to perform the In–Service
Calibration.
Table H-5: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
NOTE
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
– Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
– Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
– Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the Test
Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.
– Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
– Click the Apply button.
– Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.
– Check the In–Service Calibration check box.
– Click the Apply button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
Login to the target BTS:
– Select the target BTS icon.
– Click the Login button at the login screen.
Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
– Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
– Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up
window.
– Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
– The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.
– To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
– Add the value computed in Table H-1, Table H-2, or Table H-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
– Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
– Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
– Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
. . . continued on next page
H-16
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-5: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:
– Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.
– Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
– Click the Save button.
– Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
– To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.
Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 7, 8, and 9.
Download code and data to the target devices:
– Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.
– Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and click
the Save button to close.
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
H-17
In–Service Calibration
68P09258A31–A
Table H-5: In–Service Calibration
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Perform the In–service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.
Select the desired test:
– Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
– Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.
– Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
– Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.
– From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.
– Click the OK button to start calibration.
– Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
NOTE
S Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.
S Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires
an MCC to be selected.
S Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel elements
is specified in the CDF file.
S Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain
for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):
– Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
10
Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
– Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.
– Close the LMF window.
11
Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.
12
Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
H-18
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix I
VSWR
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
I-1
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
Purpose
The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within
acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a
sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines
have been verified.
These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each
respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna
system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak
system performance.
The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency
assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test
specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.
NOTE
Motorola recommends that the installer be familiar with the
following procedure in its entirety before beginning the actual
procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not in service.
This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX
frequencies for TX frequencies.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out
in the BTS Installation Manual.
Test equipment
The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this
test:
S LMF
S Directional coupler
S Communications test set
WARNING
Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA BBX
channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in personal
injury or serious equipment damage.
I-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Equipment Setup – HP Test Set
Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table I-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
Action
HP TEST SET
If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 on page 3-17 to set up test
equipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure I-1 (1700/1900 MHz)
or Figure I-2 (800 MHz).
– Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directional
coupler.
– Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the
directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.
– Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.
NOTE
Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):
S Set screen to RF GEN.
– For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier
between 1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set the
RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TX and
824–849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of
actual CDMA carrier between 1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
– Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.
– Set Output Port to RF OUT.
– Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.
Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.
NOTE
Set–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):
S Set screen to SPEC ANL.
–
–
–
–
Oct 2003
Under Controls, set input port to ANT.
Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.
Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.
Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.
– Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
– Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications
analyzer and Note for as PA reference.
– Record the difference of the two readings in dB.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
I-3
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Table I-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
HP TEST SET
Action
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10
VSWR +ȧ
Ȣ 1 – 10
ȣ
ȧ
Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure I-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)
RF
IN/OUT
PORT
RF OUT
ONLY
PORT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF SHORT
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
INPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
FW00342
I-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Figure I-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
INPUT
PORT
RF
SHORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
OUTPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
FW00343
Equipment Setup – Advantest Test Set
Follow the steps in Table I-2 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table I-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
Action
ADVANTEST
If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 on page 3-17 to set up test
equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure I-3.
– Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.
– Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional
coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.
– Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
I-5
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Table I-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
Action
ADVANTEST
Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)
with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:
S Push the ADVANCE Measurement key.
S Push the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
S Push the FREQ Entry key:
– For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX.
– For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
869–894 MHz for TX and 824–849 MHz for RX.
– For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
Push the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).
Verify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.
Verify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.
Push the CW Measurement key.
Push the FREQ Entry key.
– Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
– Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.
S Push the Transient Measurement key.
– Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.
– Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).
– Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER
key).
S Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.
S Push the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.
S Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.
Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10 ȣ
VSWR +ȧ
ȧ
Ȣ 1 – 10 Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
. . . continued on next page
I-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Table I-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
ADVANTEST
Action
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
10
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
11
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure I-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF IN
RF
SHORT
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
INPUT
PORT
FW00332
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
I-7
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
68P09258A31–A
Notes
I-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Appendix J
Packet Backhaul Configuration
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-1
BTS Router Initial Configuration
68P09258A31–A
BTS Router Initial Configuration
Overview
This appendix contains information and operations related to loading an
MWR 1941 BTS router with the minimum standard (canned)
configuration necessary for network communications. Once the router is
communicating on the network, the full, site-specific, operational
configuration can be downloaded to the router over the network. This
appendix includes sections on:
Terminal Setup
Downloading canned BTS router configuration files
Verifying IOS canned version of CF memory card
Replacing installed BTS router CF memory card IOS version
Verify and upgrade rommon version
Recovery from BTS router boot to rommon
Entering or changing router FE interface IP address
Preparation for site turn–over
J-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Terminal Setup
68P09258A31–A
Terminal Setup
General
This section provides the procedures to configure and save a terminal
session for communicating with the MWR 1941 BTS router. Terminal
settings are the same as those used for BTS card and module
Man–Machine Interface (MMI) communication sessions. The procedures
are for a Pentiumr processor–based computer operating with either
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000.
Using the LMF computer
LMF computer platforms can be used for communicating with the
routers, and the MMI terminal connection created for BTS card/module
optimization actions will operate with the BTS routers. See the
“Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session” section of this
appendix for additional interface hardware required for BTS router
communication.
Terminal Settings
Follow the procedure in Table J-1 to create a named HyperTerminal
connection for BTS router interface and generate a Windows desktop
shortcut for it.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows 98 in
the menus and screens used for creating a HyperTerminal
connection. In the following procedure, items applicable to:
S Windows 2000 will be identified with Win2000
S Windows 98 will be identified with Win98
Table J-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal
S For Win98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close button. (This is required the first time a HyperTerminal connection is configured, even if a
modem is not to be used.)
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, BTSRTR Session, MMI) in the
Name: window,
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-3
Terminal Setup
68P09258A31–A
Table J-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be
used for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win2000 or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 –
Win98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
With the HyperTerminal window still open and the connection running, select:
File > Properties
Click the Settings tab, click the arrow in the Emulation window, and select VT100 from the
dropdown list.
Click the ASCII Setup button, uncheck all boxes in the ASCII Setup window which appears, and
click OK.
10
Click OK for the connection Properties box.
11
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
12
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File > Exit
13
Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.
14
Perform one of the following:
S If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win98), proceed to step 16, or
S From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
15
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
S For Win98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
16
Highlight the newly–created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win2000) or clicking on it
(Win98).
17
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
18
From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
. . . continued on next page
J-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Terminal Setup
68P09258A31–A
Table J-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
19
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
NOTE
The shortcut icon can now be double–clicked to open a BTS router or BTS card/module MMI
HyperTerminal session without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
BTS Router Serial Communication
For those procedures which require serial communication with BTS
routers, follow the procedures in Table J-2 to initiate the communication
session. This procedure calls out the LMF computer platform, but any
VT100–equivalent terminal or computer equipped with terminal
emulation software and a hardware serial connector may be used.
Required Items
The following items are required to perform the verification:
S LMF computer platform or equivalent (see this manual for
requirements)
S Eight–conductor (four–pair, unshielded twisted pair is acceptable)
rollover cable, two 8–contact modular plugs (see Figure J-1 for cable
wiring requirements)
S Adapter, DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug, Global Computer
Supplies C4717 or equivalent (see Figure J-2 for adapter wiring
requirements)
Figure J-1: Wiring Diagram, BTS Router Communication Rollover Cable
8–contact Plug
Contact Numbering
(Insertion End)
8 76543 21
Locking
Clip
8–contact
Modular
Plug
8–contact
Modular
Plug
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-5
Terminal Setup
68P09258A31–A
Figure J-2: Wiring Diagram, DB–9 Plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter
Adapter
DB–9 Receptacle
Socket Numbering
(Mating Side)
4 3 2 1
DB–9
Receptacle
8–contact
Modular
Receptacle
NC
Adapter
8–contact Receptacle
Contact Numbering
(Mating Side)
12 34567 8
8 7 6
NC
Table J-2: Establishing BTS Router Serial Communication
Step
Action
If it has not been done, start the computer and allow it to complete boot–up.
If a named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router serial communication or BTS card/module MMI
communication has not been created on the LMF computer, create one as described in Table J-1 in the
“Terminal Set–up” section of this appendix.
Connect the computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure J-3.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router communication sessions by double clicking
on its Windows desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the communication session, access the connection
from the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Once the connection window opens, establish communication with the BTS router by pressing the
computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
J-6
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Terminal Setup
68P09258A31–A
Figure J-3: LMF Computer Connections to BTS Router
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
OPTOATP0001–0
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-7
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
68P09258A31–A
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
Downloading Overview
After they are generated on the OMC–R, the BTS router canned
configuration files must be transferred to another computer platform
from which they can be installed into the BTS routers. A number of
procedures may be used to move the canned configuration files from the
OMC–R to a platform from which they can be loaded into the routers.
Some alternatives are:
1. If a floppy diskette drive is available at the OMC–R, such as the one
for UNO workstations, the configuration files can be transferred to
an LMF computer or similar machine using the CDF file transfer
procedure in the Preparing the LMF section of this manual.
Directories identified in Table J-3 must be used rather than those in
the CDF file transfer procedure.
2. If a Windows–based server connection is available in the operator’s
network and it can provide an FTP or telnet connection to the
OMC–R, files may be transferred by either the FTP or telnet
methods.
3. If a dial–up connection is available for accessing the OMC–R, an
FTP or telnet session may be possible to transfer files to the
computer used to load the CF memory cards.
The procedure provided in this section covers FTP transfer using a
Windows–based server in the operator’s network. Coordinate with the
local network administrator to determine the method and procedure to
use on a specific network.
Prerequisites
The following must be obtained from the local network administrator
before performing the canned configuration file FTP procedure in
Table J-3:
S User ID and password to log onto the OMC–R
S Name of the sub–directory where the specific BTS router group
canned configuration files to be downloaded were created
FTP File Transfer from the OMC–R
This procedure uses the Windows–based LMF computer platform to
download BTS router canned configuration files from the OMC–R.
Follow the procedure in Table J-3.
Table J-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
If it has not been done, create a directory on the LMF computer where the BTS router canned
configuration files will be stored.
If it has not been done, obtain the OMC–R logon user ID and password from the local network
administrator.
. . . continued on next page
J-8
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
68P09258A31–A
Table J-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the local network and log on.
NOTE
This procedure uses the command line FTP client supplied with Windows 98, Second Edition (Win98
SE) and Windows 2000 (Win2K); however, any commercially available FTP client application can be
used. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operation of an alternative application.
Open a command line (MS DOS) window by clicking on Start > Programs > Command Prompt.
When the command line window opens, change to the directory where the canned configuration files
will be stored on the LMF computer by entering:
cd pathname
Where pathname = the path to the required directory.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\> cd Can_Cfg
C:\Can_Cfg>
Check the contents of the directory by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg>dir
Volume in drive C is MAIN
Volume Serial Number is F2AA–1721
Directory of C:\Can_Cfg>
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
03:46p

03:46p

..
03:46p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.blue
03:47p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.red
2 File(s)
4,644 bytes
2 Dir(s)
2,556,045,312 bytes free
C:\Can_Cfg>
If either or both of the following files are found in the directory, delete them or move them to another
directory:
S btsrtr_config.blue
S btsrtr_config.red
Begin the FTP session by entering the following:
ftp hostname
Where hostname = the OMC–R hostname or IP address.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg> ftp OMCR–1
C:\Can_Cfg>
Connected to OMCR–1.
220 OMCR–1 FTP server (SunOS 5.6) ready.
User (OMCR–1:(none)):
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-9
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
68P09258A31–A
Table J-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
Enter the User ID and password when prompted, pressing the Enter key after each. A response
similar to the following will be displayed:
User (OMCR–1:(none)): scadm
331 Password required for scadm.
Password:
230 User scadm logged in.
ftp>
10
Change to the directory where the BTS router canned configuration file sub–directories are created and
verify the present working directory by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each:
cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
pwd
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
240 CWD command successful.
ftp> pwd
245 ”/home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs” is current directory.
11
Enter the ls command to list the contents of the directory and be sure the specific canned configuration
directory name provided by the administrator exists. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
Mon_Jul_2_01:55:07_CDT_2002
Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
Tue_Aug_04_10:35:22_CDT_2002
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
ftp: 30 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 1.50Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
NOTE
Directory names where canned configuration files are located will consist of the
weekday_month_day_time_year when the canned configuration files were created on the OMC–R.
12
Change to the directory specified for the BTS router group to be configured and list the directory
contents by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:
cd weekday_month_day_time_year
ls
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> cd Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
btsrtr_canned.blue
btsrtr_canned.red
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
ftp: 39 bytes received in 0.05Seconds 0.78Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
. . . continued on next page
J-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
Table J-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
13
Change to the binary transfer mode and, if desired, turn on hash mark printing for transfer progress by
entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:
bin
hash
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> bin
200 Type set to I.
ftp> hash
Hash mark printing On
ftp>
ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .
NOTE
With Win98 SE, turning on hash mark printing can slow down file transfer in certain circumstances,
but the canned configuration files are quite small (approximately 2.5 KB) so there should be little
noticeable effect.
14
14a
Download the BTS router canned configuration files to the LMF computer by performing the following:
– Enter the following to download the first canned configuration file:
get btsrtr_canned.blue
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> get btsrtr_canned.blue
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.blue (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
14b
– Enter the following to download the second BTS router canned configuration file:
get btsrtr_canned.red
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> get btsrtr_canned.red
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.red (10.182.29.117,80) (2223 bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-11
Downloading Minimum Canned BTS Router Configuration Files
68P09258A31–A
Table J-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
15
Action
Before terminating the FTP session, open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the directory
where the canned configuration files are to be stored to be sure the files are present. Perform the
following:
15a
– Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer.
15b
– In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform one of the following depending on the LMF
computer operating system:
–– Win98 SE: If necessary, expand the directory display for the drive where the canned configuration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to the drive icon.
–– Win2K: Expand the user profile and directory display for the drive where the canned configuration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to each icon, respectively.
15c
– Expand any sub–directories as required to display the directory folder where the canned
configuration files are to be stored.
15d
– Click on the directory folder icon where the canned configuration files are to be stored.
15e
– In the right–hand pane, verify that the files btsrtr_canned.blue and btsrtr_canned.red
appear.
15f
– If the files appear, proceed to step 16.
15g
– If the files do not appear, repeat step 14, its sub–steps, step 15 and its sub–steps.
16
Close Windows Explorer, and, in the command line window, enter the bye command to terminate the
FTP session. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
C:\Can_Cfg>
17
Close the command line window by entering the exit command.
18
BTS router canned configuration files are now ready for transfer to a BTS router.
J-12
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
Overview
This section covers the procedures and commands required to verify the
IOS version loaded on BTS router CF memory cards and copy standard
canned configuration files to the routers. Because of the set–up required
and the length of some of the procedures, Motorola recommends
performing the actions covered in this section at a central location to
prepare the BTS routers for installation prior to the site visit.
IOS Version Verification and File Sequence Position
Version verification – The IOS version loaded on the BTS router CF
memory card should be verified as the version required for operation on
the network where the routers will be installed. If the loaded IOS version
is not correct, it can be replaced with a different version. There are
several methods available to accomplish version verification. These
depend on the equipment and software applications the user selects to
use in installing the canned configuration files in the BTS routers.
Appropriate verification procedures are included in each of the two
canned configuration installation methods covered in this section.
Methods to change the loaded IOS version are provided in the Change
BTS Router IOS Version section of this appendix and are referenced at
the appropriate places in the canned configuration installation methods.
File sequence position – During initialization, the MWR 1941 router
will first search the startup–config file for a boot system command
line telling it in what directory and file to find the boot loader. If this line
is not found, the router will default to attempting to boot from the first
file in its flash memory. Flash memory for the MWR 1941 is the CF
memory card (software identifier slot0:). The canned configuration files
used for BTS router installation do not contain a boot system command
line because of the need to maintain flexibility for IOS version changes.
Because of this, it is critical that the IOS file is the first file listed on the
CF memory card. The canned configuration installation procedures
contain steps to assure that this is the case, and, if it is not, provide
guidance to correct the condition. It is important to remember that, if the
router boots and displays a rommon 1 > prompt, the IOS file is
missing, out of sequence, has a corrupted flash memory image or the
startup–config file contains a boot system line which specifies a
missing or incorrect IOS pathname/filename.
Canned Configuration File Installation
Filename and installation location requirements – The canned
configuration files for the BTS routers must be copied to the CF memory
card. The filename of the file on the CF memory card must be
canned–config. Canned configuration file location and filename
requirements are a result of Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) actions
during the process of switching a BTS from packet to circuit mode. In
this process, the MWC will query the BTS routers’ slot0: directory for a
file named canned–config. A missing or mis–named file will cause
problems with execution of the mode–switching process.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-13
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Installation Methods – The startup–config configuration file used
by the BTS router during initialization is stored in NVRAM. This is a
memory device internal to the router and is separate from the CF
memory card. To install the canned configuration file so the router will
use it during boot–up, the file must be copied into the
startup–config file in NVRAM. There are two methods available to
accomplish this:
1. Using a tftp server application to copy the canned configuration file
from the Windows–based LMF computer to the CF memory card
installed in a router, and then copying it to the startup–config
file in the router’s NVRAM
2. Using a CF memory card reader to copy the canned configuration
file to a CF memory card, and then, once the CF memory card is
installed in the router, using a HyperTerminal communication
session to copy the file from the CF memory card to the
startup–config file in the router’s NVRAM
Comparison of methods – Preparation for using the tftp server
application method is extensive and requires setting up simultaneous
serial and FE communication sessions with the router. This method
offers the advantage of being able to verify IOS file sequence position
immediately and supporting direct file transfers between the router and
LMF computer without removing the CF memory card. As an
alternative, using a CF memory card reader to copy the canned
configuration file to a CF memory card, and from there to the
startup–config file requires very little set–up. With this method, the
IOS file sequence position can only be verified once the CF memory
card is installed in the router, and any file transfers between the router
and LMF computer require physically moving the CF memory card
between the router and card reader.
Procedures to use each method – Using the tftp server application to
copy the canned configuration file to a CF memory card is covered in the
Method 1 subsection. Performing the transfer process with a card reader
is covered in the Method 2 subsection. The applicable procedures for
verifying the loaded IOS version and file sequence position are included
in each method.
File operations using a CF memory card reader – Only file transfers
should be performed using the CF memory card reader. CF memory card
formatting should be performed in a BTS router using a HyperTerminal
connection. Attempting to format a CF memory card from a
Windows–based computer using a card reader could result in
unpredictable BTS router operation.
CAUTION
Do not format BTS router CF memory cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF memory cards in a
BTS router.
J-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Method 1: Using a TFTP Server to Load to CF Memory Card
Required Equipment and Software
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in this manual.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers equipped
with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows 98 SE and using
the FAT16 file system will not operate properly, resulting in a
complete site outage.
S One of the following for the Windows–based computer:
– Internal 10/100baseT Network Interface Card (NIC)
– PCMCIA 10/100baseT NIC
Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
A copy of the MWR 1941 router IOS version required for the network
where the routers are to be installed (contact the network administrator
or the Motorola account team for information on obtaining the
required MWR 1941 IOS version)
A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
Required Materials
The following material is required to perform this method:
S Marking material to identify the BTS router and CF memory card with
the installed configuration (blue or red)
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-15
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Required Publications
The following publications are required to perform procedures in this
section:
S this manual
S Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
Preparation for Canned Configuration File TFTP
Transfer to CF Memory Card
Preparation for a canned configuration file tftp transfer consists of the
following activities:
1. Setting the LMF computer NIC IP address
2. Creating a directory (folder) on the LMF computer to be used for all
tftp file transfers
3. Installing the tftp server application on the LMF computer, and
setting the tftp server application root directory to the directory
created in 2, above
4. Connecting the LMF computer to the BTS router for both
HyperTerminal (serial) and Ethernet communication
5. BTS router power–up and initial configuration for Ethernet
communication
The following procedures are used to accomplish all of these preparatory
actions.
Set LMF computer NIC TCP/IP address and create the default
TFTP directory – Follow the procedure in Table J-4 to set the NIC IP
address.
NOTE
IMPORTANT! If the IP address for the LAN connection on an
LMF computer is being changed to support tftp downloads to a
BTS router, the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask
for the NIC must be restored before the LMF can log into a BTS
to perform an optimization or ATP.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows 98 in
the menus and screens used for setting or changing a NIC
connection. In the following procedure, items applicable
to:Windows 2000 will be identified with Win2000Windows 98
will be identified with Win98
J-16
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP Directory
Step
Action
Start the computer.
Login and allow the computer to boot to the desktop.
Depending on the installed operating system, from the Windows Start menu, select one of the
following:
S Win2000: Settings > Network and Dial–up Connections
S Win98: Settings > Control Panel and double–click Network.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:
S For Win2000, in the list of displayed connections, locate the Local Area Network connection for the
NIC to be used for BTS router Ethernet communication.
S For Win98, in the Configuration tab of the Network dialog box, locate the TCP/IP connection for
the installed NIC.
– If TCP/IP does not appear in the displayed list of installed network components, refer to the
operating system documentation and install TCP/IP.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:
S For Win2000, highlight the connection for the NIC and right click the highlighted connection, and
select Properties from the pop–up menu.
S For Win98:
– Highlight the TCP/IP NIC connection in the displayed list of installed network components.
– Click the Properties button.
– Skip to step 8.
For Win2000 , in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box which appears, if Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is not showing in the Components checked are used by this connection: listbox,
refer to the operating system documentation and install TCP/IP.
For Win2000, if the checkbox next to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry is not checked, click in the
box to check it.
Perform one of the following:
S Win2000: Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry, and click on the Properties button below
the Components checked are used by this connection: listbox.
S Win98: From the tabs displayed in the TCP/IP Properties dialog box which opens, select the IP
Address tab if it is not at the front.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-17
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-4: Set LMF Computer NIC IP Address and Create a Default TFTP Directory
Step
Action
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box which appears (Win2000) or the IP Address
tab of the TCP/IP Properties dialog box (Win98), perform the following:
9a
– If a black dot is not showing in the the radio button circle next to Use the following IP address:
(Win2000) or Specify an IP address (Win98), click on the radio button.
–– A black dot will appear in the circle.
9b
– If using an LMF computer, record the IP address and subnet mask used for LMF–BTS
communication so they can be re–entered when tftp transfer activities for the BTS router are
completed.
9c
– Enter 100.100.100.1 in the IP address: box.
9d
– Enter 255.255.255.252 in the Subnet mask: box.
10
Click the OK button for the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Win2000) or the
TCP/IP Properties box (Win98).
11
Click the OK button for the Local Area Connection Properties box (Win2000) or the Network box
(Win98).
12
In Win98, click File > Close to close the Control Panel window.
13
Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
14
If the default tftp directory will be the same directory in which the files downloaded from the OMC–R
are stored, proceed to step 22.
15
In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, locate the icon for the drive where the default tftp
directory is to be created.
16
Highlight the drive icon and click Files > New > Folder.
17
While observing the new folder icon in the right–hand pane, type the name for the folder (for example,
tftp_files), and press the Enter key.
18
In Windows Explorer, locate the directory where the canned configuration files downloaded from the
OMC–R are stored.
19
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.
20
Scroll the left–hand pane until the newly–created default tftp directory is visible.
21
In the right–hand pane, highlight the canned configuration files and drag them to the default tftp
directory.
22
In the left–hand pane, click on the default tftp directory, and verify that the canned configuration files
appear in the right–hand pane.
23
Load a copy of the required BTS router IOS version into the default tftp directory using FTP, internet
download, or media such as a Zip disk (file size is over 7 MB).
24
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
J-18
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Install and configure tftp server application
To obtain, install, and configure the Cisco or PumpKIN tftp software
applications, refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in
Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation For
other tftp server applications, install and configure the application
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Important: When entering the name of the tftp server root
directory while configuring the tftp server application, be sure to
use the name of the directory identified in Table J-4, step 14, or
created in Table J-4, step 17, above.
NOTE
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router by following the
procedure in Table J-5 and referring to Figure J-4..
Figure J-4: LMF Computer TFTP Connections to BTS Router
FAST ETHERNET PORT FE 0
(SOFTWARE DESIGNATION FA0/0)
CONSOLE
PORT
ETHERNET
CROSSOVER
CABLE
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
10/100BASE T
NIC PORT
BTSRTR0025
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-19
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-5: Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for TFTP File Transfer
Step
Action
If the BTS router has not been connected to a power source, be sure the +27 Vdc power source is not
on, and connect it to the router.
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure J-4, referring to the list of required
equipment in this section as required.
If the LMF computer has not been started, turn it on, login, and allow it to boot to the desktop.
Refer to the procedure in Table J-2 of this appendix, and start a HyperTerminal communication session
for the BTS router.
Start the tftp server application as specified for the software (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server –
Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation or the manufacturer’s
instructions).
BTS router power–up and initial configuration for
Ethernet communication
Follow the procedure in Table J-6 to apply power to the router and set
an initial configuration for Ethernet communication.
S The required version of the IOS is loaded on the CF memory card
S The CF memory card is installed in the BTS router
Table J-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Be sure a CF memory card loaded with the Cisco IOS is installed in the BTS router (refer to the BTS Router
Card and Module Replacement section of the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide 68P09258A64 for instructions
to access the CF memory card slot).
* IMPORTANT
In this step do not touch the computer keyboard until the router completes the boot process. The router
will buffer any keystrokes made during the boot process and interpret them as commands to be
executed immediately following boot completion.
Apply power to the router and allow it to complete boot–up.
If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter key and proceed to step 5:
Press RETURN to get started!
. . . continued on next page
J-20
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter key:
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: no
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobin
Router>
At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
At the Router# privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure submode:
configure terminal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
The router is now in the global configuration mode and ready to accept configuration changes entered
from the keyboard.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-21
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
At the global configuration mode prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the Enter
key after each command:
hostname btsrtr1
interface fa0/0
ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
speed 100
duplex full
no shutdown
line con 0
exec–timeout 0 0
no login
line vty 0 4
no login
Responses similar to the following will be displayed:
Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1
BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0
BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100
BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex full
BTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdown
BTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#
Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the privileged EXEC mode prompt by holding
down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl+z). A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the configuration
process and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.
Verify port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP address by entering the following:
show ip interface brief
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ip int br
Interface
IP Address
OK?
FastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
FastEthernet0/1 unassigned
YES
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
administratively down
administratively down
administratively down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
BTSRTR1#
10
The router is now configured for Ethernet communication on FE 0, and the canned configuration file
can be transferred by tftp. Proceed to Table J-7.
J-22
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Verifying IOS Version and Canned Configuration File
TFTP Transfer to the BTS Router
Prerequisites – The following is required prior to performing this
procedure:
S A copy of the required MWR 1941 router IOS version file is installed
in the default tftp directory (transfer the file to the LMF computer
using FTP, internet download, or media such as a Zip disk; file size is
approximately 7–8 MB)
IOS verification and canned configuration file transfer – Follow the
procedure in Table J-7 to verify the loaded IOS version and transfer the
canned configuration files from the LMF computer to the BTS router CF
memory card.
NOTE
IMPORTANT: MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS
version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
NOTE
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router
operation and programming. Before performing this procedure,
review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming
information and procedures in MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge
Router Software Configuration Guide; part number
78–13983–01. Have this publication available for reference
while performing this procedure.
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
CAUTION
If personal firewall and/or intrusion detection software such as Black ICE is running on the LMF computer,
shut it down before performing this procedure. If this is not done, the tftp transfer process will not operate.
On the LMF computer, if it has not been done, start the tftp server according to the manufacturer’s
directions (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in the Cellular System Administration
– CDMA OnLine Documentation).
* IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This
router model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
If a HyperTerminal communication session with the BTS router is not running, start one following the
procedure in Table J-2.
In the HyperTerminal window, the router must be in the privileged EXEC mode, as indicated by a
number sign at the end of the prompt:
BTSRTR1#
Oct 2003
Be sure the Ethernet crossover cable is connected between the LMF computer NIC port and the BTS
router FE 0 port (see Figure J-4).
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-23
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
Begin verification that the CF memory card contains the correct version of the Cisco IOS by entering
the following:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24879104 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
1. The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd .
If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the
default setting.
2. If slot0: is included in the command, be sure to include the colon (:) after slot0 when typing the
command.
3. The IOS filename will be similar to the following:
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
. . . continued on next page
J-24
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
Direct the router to show the version information by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT
SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
Compare the IOS filename returned in step 5 and the second line of the version information in step 6.
Note the correspondence between the filename and IOS version information.
If the IOS filename from the CF memory card returned in step 5 is different than the filename of the
required IOS version loaded in the LMF computer default tftp directory, perform the procedure in
Table J-13 to load the required version, and then return to step 9, below.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-25
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
If the IOS version is correct and there is more than one file loaded on the CF memory card, be sure the
IOS file is the first file listed in the directory content display. If it is not, perform the following:
9a
– Backup all files on the CF memory card to the LMF computer default tftp directory by performing
steps 3 through 10 of Table J-13.
9b
– Perform steps 25 through 29 of Table J-13, as applicable.
9c
– Type the following to delete a possible boot system line in the startup–config file, pressing the
Enter key after the command and at each prompt to confirm the filename and deletion operation:
del nvram:startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del nvram:startup–config
Delete filename [startup–config]?
Delete nvram:startup–config? [confirm]
[OK]
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
9d
– Verify the startup–config file size has been reduced to a minimum by entering the following:
dir nvram:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir nvram:
Directory of nvram:/
53
54
–rw–
––––


startup–config
private–config
57336 bytes total (57274 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
10
At the privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following:
copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config
Where color = blue or red, as applicable.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []?
. . . continued on next page
J-26
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
11
Action
At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
12
At the prompt for the destination filename, press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): !
[OK – 2457/4096 bytes]
2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
13
Verify that the canned configuration file is saved on the CF memory card by entering dir command. A
response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2457
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24877983 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
14
To allow the BTS router to boot using the canned configuration, enter the following:
copy canned–config startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
15
When prompted for the destination file name, press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2457 bytes copied in 3.52 secs
BTSRTR1#
16
Display and note the file size of startup–config by entering the following:
dir nvram:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of nvram:/
26
27
–rw–
––––
2457


startup–config
private–config
29688 bytes total (24774 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-27
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
17
Scroll the HyperTerminal window back to the slot0: directory display obtained in step 13, above.
18
Compare the file size of startup–config to the canned configuration file to verify the copy operation.
File sizes should be the same.
19
If desired, the contents of the startup–config file may be verified against the file listings at the end of
this appendix for the blue or red canned configuration, as applicable, by entering the following:
show startup–config
NOTE
Pressing the space bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another screen–full of data. Pressing the Enter
key will scroll the screen one line at a time.
20
Verify the router will boot properly on the IOS and revised startup–config files by entering the
following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
21
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
22
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
23
Verify the router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > prompt or error messages related to port
configurations. If the router boots to the rommon prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS Router
Boot to rommon section of this appendix.
24
Using the tagging materials, tag the router to clearly identify the installed configuration (blue
(BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)).
25
Remove the CF memory from the router following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide
, mark the installed configuration (blue or red) on the card label, and install the card in the router
following the procedure in the FRU Guide.
26
If an additional router must have the canned configuration installed, perform the following:
26a
– Disconnect the cabling from the BTS router.
26b
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
26c
– Repeat the procedures in Table J-5, Table J-6, and this table (Table J-7) using the additional router.
27
If no additional routers must be configured, perform steps 26a and 26b.
28
On the LMF computer, shut down the tftp server application and exit the HyperTerminal session.
29
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table J-4, step 9b.
CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
J-28
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader to Load CF Memory Card
Required Equipment and Software
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in this manual.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers equipped
with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows 98 SE and using
the FAT16 file system will not operate properly, resulting in a
complete site outage.
S Compact Flash memory card reader device and software driver for the
operating system installed on the LMF computer
CAUTION
Card readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices
such as Smart Media cards will not work with the CF memory
cards used in the MWR 1941 routers. Do not attempt to use a
card reader intended for another type of memory device.
S Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
S A copy of the MWR 1941 router IOS version required for the network
where the routers are to be installed (contact the network administrator
and the Motorola account team for information on obtaining the
required MWR 1941 IOS version)
S A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
Required Materials
The following material is required to perform this method:
S Tagging and marking material to identify the BTS router and CF
memory card with the installed configuration (blue or red)
Required Publications
The following publications are required to perform procedures in this
section:
S Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
File Operations Using a CF Memory Card Reader
Only file transfers should be performed using the CF memory card
reader. CF memory card formatting should be performed in a BTS router
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-29
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
using a HyperTerminal connection. Attempting to format a CF memory
card from a Windows–based computer using a card reader could result in
unpredictable BTS router operation.
CAUTION
Do not format BTS router CF memory cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF memory cards in a
BTS router.
Verifying IOS Version and Loading BTS Router Canned
Configuration File to CF Memory Card Using a CF
Memory Card Reader
The process of transferring a canned configuration file to a BTS router
using a CF memory card reader consists of the following activities:
1. Transfer the canned configuration file to the router’s CF memory
card using a CF memory card reader
2. Copy the file from the CF memory card to the router’s
startup–config file
The following procedures are used to accomplish these actions.
Prerequisites
The following is required prior to performing this procedure:
S A copy of the required MWR 1941 router IOS version file is installed
in the default tftp directory (transfer the file to the LMF computer
using FTP, internet download, or media such as a Zip disk; file size is
approximately 7–8 MB)
Verifying IOS version and transferring canned
configuration file to the router’s CF memory card
NOTE
IMPORTANT: MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS
version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
Transfer canned configuration files from the LMF computer to a BTS
router CF memory card by following the procedure in Table J-8.
Table J-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
If it has not been done, install a CF memory card loaded with the IOS in the BTS router by following the
procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide .
* IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This
router model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
. . . continued on next page
J-30
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
Table J-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router and start a HyperTerminal communication session with
the router by following the procedure in Table J-2.
If it has not been done, be sure the +27 Vdc power supply output is OFF, and connect the BTS router
to the +27 Vdc power supply.
* IMPORTANT
In this step do not touch the computer keyboard until the router completes the boot process. The router
will buffer any keystrokes made during the boot process and interpret them as commands to be
executed immediately following boot completion.
Apply power to the router and allow it to complete boot–up.
If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter key and proceed to step 7:
Press RETURN to get started!
If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter key:
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: no
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobin
Router>
CAUTION
Use only a card reader specifically designed for CF memory cards to perform this procedure. Card
readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices such as Smart Media cards will not work
with the CF memory cards used in the MWR 1941 routers.
If it has not been done, follow the CF memory card reader manufacturer’s instructions to load the CF
memory card driver application for the operating system being used onto the LMF computer.
Connect the CF memory card reader to the LMF computer following the card reader manufacturer’s
instructions.
Remove the CF memory card from the BTS router by following the procedure in the
1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide
10
Insert the CF memory card into the card reader as specified by the card reader manufacturer’s
instructions.
11
On the LMF computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-31
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
Step
12
Action
NOTE
The CF memory card reader will appear as a disk drive in Windows Explorer with a disk drive letter
and icon.
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF memory card.
13
Verify that the CF memory card contains the required version of the IOS by performing the following:
13a
– In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF memory card icon.
13b
– In the right–hand pane, note the IOS filename loaded on the card, and record it.
NOTE
The IOS filename will be similar to mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin.
14
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where the canned
configuration files downloaded from the OMC–R and required IOS version are stored.
15
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.
16
In the the right–hand pane, locate the filename of the required IOS version and compare it to the
filename recorded in step 13b, above.
17
If filenames are different, proceed to Table J-11 to replace the IOS on the CF memory card and return
to step 18, below.
18
In the right–hand pane, highlight the canned configuration file to be transferred to the CF memory
card and drag it to the CF memory card disk drive icon.
19
Verify the canned configuration file has been copied to the CF memory card by clicking on the CF
memory card disk drive icon in the left–hand pane, and verifying that the canned configuration file
appears in the in the right–hand pane.
NOTE
Do not be concerned if the canned configuration file appears before the IOS file in the file sequence
displayed by Windows Explorer. The position of the IOS file in the sequence of files on the CF
memory card can not be verified until the CF memory card is installed in the BTS router.
20
With the CF memory card disk drive icon still selected, change the name of the canned configuration
file on the card to canned–config by doing the following:
20a
– In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, click on the canned configuration filename.
–– The filename will be highlighted.
20b
– Wait approximately two seconds, and then click on the canned configuration file filename again.
–– A hair–line rectangle will appear around the highlighted filename.
20c
– After the rectangle appears around the highlighted filename, type the following:
canned–config
20d
21
– Press the Enter key or click on the canned configuration file icon.
–– The rectangle around the canned configuration filename will disappear and the filename will
remain highlighted.
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
. . . continued on next page
J-32
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-8: Transfer Canned Configuration File to CF Memory Card with CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
22
Remove the CF memory card with the IOS version and canned configuration file from the card reader,
and mark the card label with the canned configuration (blue or red) copied to it.
23
Install the CF memory card in the BTS router by following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS
FRU Guide .
24
Proceed to Table J-9 to copy the canned configuration from the CF memory card to the BTS router’s
startup–config file.
Copy Canned Configuration File from the CF Memory
Card to the BTS Router’s Startup Configuration and
verify IOS file sequence
To allow the BTS router to automatically boot using the canned
configuration, the configuration must be copied to the the router’s
startup–config file in NVRAM. Follow the procedure in Table J-9 to
accomplish this.
Table J-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Startup
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
If it has not been done, install the CF memory card with the canned configuration and required IOS
version in the BTS router by following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide .
At this point, the router should be powered up and displaying the Router> prompt in the
HyperTerminal window of the LMF computer communication session. If it is not, perform steps 1
through 6 of Table J-8.
At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-33
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Startup
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
Step
Action
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd . If
the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default
setting.
Display the directory listing of the CF memory card by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
Be sure the IOS file is the first file listed in the directory content display. If it is not, perform the
procedure in Table J-12, and then return to step 6, below.
Copy the canned configuration to the BTS router’s startup configuration file by entering the following:
copy slot0:canned–config startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#copy slot0:canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
When prompted for the destination file name, press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
Router#copy slot0:canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2218 bytes copied in 3.52 secs
Router1#
Check the file size of the startup–config to verify the copy operation by entering the following:
dir nvram:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of nvram:/
26
27
–rw–
––––
2218


startup–config
private–config
29688 bytes total (25247 bytes free)
Router#
NOTE
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
. . . continued on next page
J-34
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verifying IOS Canned Version of the CF Memory Card
68P09258A31–A
Table J-9: Copy Canned Configuration File to BTS Router Startup
Configuration and Verify IOS File Position
Step
Action
If desired, the contents of the startup–config file may be verified against the file listings at the end of
this appendix for the blue or red canned configuration, as applicable, by entering the following:
show startup–config
NOTE
Pressing the space bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another screen–full of data. Pressing the Enter
key will scroll the screen one line at a time.
10
Verify the router will boot properly on the IOS and revised startup–config files by entering the
following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
11
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
12
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
13
Verify the router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > prompt or error messages related to port
configurations. If the router boots to the rommon prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS Router
Boot to rommon section of this appendix.
14
Using the tagging materials, tag the router to clearly identify the installed configuration (blue
(BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)).
15
If an additional router must have the canned configuration installed, perform the following:
15a
– Disconnect the cabling for the HyperTerminal communications session from the BTS router, and
minimize the HyperTerminal window on the LMF computer.
15b
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
15c
– Repeat the procedures in Table J-8 and this table (Table J-9) using the additional router.
16
If no additional routers must be configured, perform steps 15a and 15b.
17
On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal session.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-35
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Background
BTS routers are supplied with CF memory cards pre–loaded with a
version of the IOS. Prior to installing the routers in a BTS, the loaded
IOS version should be verified as being the one required for the network.
It is critical to also verify that the IOS file is the first file on the CF
memory card. If another file precedes the IOS file, the BTS router will
not boot properly and will not function in the network.
Equipment and Software Required for Verification Methods
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in Chapter 3 of this manual:
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers equipped
with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows 98 SE and using
the FAT16 file system will not operate properly, resulting in a
complete site outage.
S Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
S A copy of the MWR 1941 router IOS version required for the network
where the routers are to be installed
NOTE
Contact the network administrator or the Motorola Account
Team for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy of the
required IOS version.
S The MWR 1941 will accept a voltage from –60 Vdc to + 60 Vdc
during configuration and file operations
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
J-36
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Method 1: Replacement of Installed Router CF Card IOS Data
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped with a tftp
server application to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the IOS version loaded on a CF memory card and running on
a BTS router
2. Replace the IOS version installed in a BTS router
3. Ensure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card
Additional required equipment/software
For this method, the following software application is required in
addition to the common items required for both methods:
S Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
S A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp file
transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table J-4, Table J-5, Table J-6, and steps 1 through 8 of
Table J-7
S A copy of the required IOS version is loaded into the tftp default
directory of the LMF computer
Replacing installed IOS version and verifying file
sequence position
Follow the procedure in Table J-10 to replace the installed IOS version
using the tftp server application, and ensure the IOS file is first in the
stored file sequence on the CF memory card.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-37
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in Table J-4, Table J-5, Table J-6, and steps 1
through 8 of Table J-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.
NOTE
The IOS present working directory defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the
present working directory has been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working
directory by entering pwd . If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd
slot0: to return to the default setting.
Identify the filename of the currently loaded IOS which must be replaced by entering dir command. A
response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051844
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:15:08
Mar 01 1993 00:11:00
mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24878360 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
Begin to backup the currently installed version of the router’s IOS to the LMF computer’s default tftp
directory by entering the following:
copy old_IOS_filename tftp:
Where old_IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS currently loaded on the BTS router CF memory
card.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin tftp:
Address or name of remote host []?
At the remote host prompt, enter the following:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
. . . continued on next page
J-38
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!
7051844 bytes copied in 109.92 secs (64697 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
If additional files are stored on the CF memory card, begin backing them up to the LMF computer’s
default tftp directory by entering the following:
copy additional_filename tftp:
Where additional_filename = the filename of an additional file loaded on the BTS router CF memory
card.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config tftp:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [canned–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [canned–config]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-39
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
10
If more files are stored on the CF memory card, repeat steps 6 through 9 until all files have been
backed up to the LMF computer.
11
Delete all files from the CF memory card by entering the following command:
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
12
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
13
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
BTSRTR1#
14
Verify all files have been deleted from the CF memory card by entering the dir command. A response
similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
No files in directory
31932416 bytes total (31932416 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
J-40
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
15
Begin to copy the required version of the IOS from the LMF computer to the BTS router by entering the
following:
copy tftp:new_IOS_filename slot0:
Where new_IOS_filename = the filename of the required IOS for the BTS router.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
16
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer. A response similar to the
following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
17
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
18
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is not
correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default
filename is selected:
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!
[OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]
7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-41
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
19
Action
Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new IOS file is there by entering the dir
command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24880440 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
20
If any additional files previously stored on the CF memory card are to be copied to the card, perform
the following:
copy tftp:filename slot0:
Where filename = the filename of the file to be copied to the CF memory card
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:canned–config slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
21
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer. A response similar to the
following will be displayed if the default IP address is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
22
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/canned–config...
Loading basic_config from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
23
After the additional file is copied to the CF memory card, display the CF memory card directory by
entering the dir command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
24
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
The IOS file must be the first file listed for the BTS router to boot properly. If it is, proceed to step 29.
. . . continued on next page
J-42
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
25
If another file is listed before the IOS file, delete the file by performing steps 11 through 13 and
display the directory of the CF memory card as described in step 23 to be sure the file is deleted.
26
Copy the file from the LMF computer to the CF memory card again by performing steps 20 through
23.
27
If the file is again listed before the IOS file in the CF memory card directory display, format the CF
memory card by performing steps 11 through 14 of this table.
28
Copy the IOS file and any other required file to the formatted CF memory card by performing steps 15
through 24.
29
If additional files are to be transferred to the CF memory card, perform steps 20 through 24 for each
one.
30
After making sure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card, restart the BTS router with the
new IOS version by entering the following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
31
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
32
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
33
Once the router has completed rebooting, change to the privileged EXEC mode and confirm the
booted IOS version is correct by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following partial example will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc1)
BTSRTR1#
34
Verify the version number displayed in the second line of the version information is the correct IOS
version.
35
If this procedure was entered from step 8 of Table J-7, return to Table J-7, step 9.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-43
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-10: Using a TFTP Server Application for Replacing Loaded
IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
36
Action
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
36a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
36b
– Disconnect all other cabling from the BTS router.
36c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
37
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table J-4, step 9b.
CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
Method 2: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacement of Installed IOS
Version and Changing File Sequence Position
This subsection contains the file replacement and file sequence
manipulation procedures to use when transferring files with a CF
memory card reader.
Replace IOS Version Installed on the CF Memory Card
Description – This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped
with a CF memory card reader to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the IOS version loaded on a CF memory card and running on
a BTS router
2. Replace the IOS version installed in a BTS router
3. Ensure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card
Additional required equipment/software – For this method, the
following equipment item and associated software is required in addition
to the common items required for both methods:
S Compact Flash memory card reader device and software driver for the
operating system installed on the LMF computer
CAUTION
Card readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices
such as Smart Media cards will not work with the CF memory
cards used in the MWR 1941 routers. Do not attempt to use a
card reader intended for another type of memory device.
Prerequisites – The following are required prior to performing this
procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for CF
memory card reader file transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in steps 1 through 8 of Table J-8
S A copy of the required IOS version is loaded into the desired directory
of the LMF computer
J-44
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
File operations using a CF memory card reader – Only file transfers
should be performed using the CF memory card reader. CF memory card
formatting should be performed in a BTS router using a HyperTerminal
connection. Attempting to format a CF memory card from a
Windows–based computer using a card reader could result in
unpredictable BTS router operation.
CAUTION
Do not format BTS router CF memory cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF memory cards in a
BTS router.
Replacing installed IOS version – Follow the procedure in Table J-11
to replace the installed IOS version using a CF memory card reader and
to ensure the IOS file is first in the stored file sequence on the CF
memory card.
Table J-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in steps 1 through 17 of Table J-8. If necessary,
perform these procedures now.
With the CF memory card in the CF memory card reader and the card reader icon highlighted in the
left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform the following to delete the IOS file from the card:
2a
– In the right–hand pane of Windows Explorer, highlight the IOS file to be removed.
2b
– Right–click and select Delete from the popup menu.
CAUTION
When performing the following step and its associated substeps, files should be moved to and from
the CF memory card one by one to reduce the potential for disrupting the the CF memory card file
sequence. Do not attempt to move multiple files by highlighting and dragging and dropping all of
them at one time.
If there are more files on the CF memory card which must be retained, perform the following:
3a
– Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF computer directory where the
required IOS version and canned configuration files are stored.
3b
– In the right–hand pane, highlight the additional file on the CF memory card which is to be
retained.
3c
– While holding down the Ctrl key on the LMF computer, drag and drop the highlighted file into
the directory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS and canned config files are stored.
3d
– If additional files loaded on the CF memory card must be retained, repeat steps 3b and 3c for each
file until all files have been moved from the CF memory card to the directory on the LMF
computer.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-45
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
When all files on the CF memory card have been deleted or moved, as applicable, highlight the
directory in the left–hand pane where the required IOS version and canned configuration files are
stored.
Verify that all files from the CF memory card which must be retained were moved to the directory by
checking the filenames in the right–hand pane.
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the CF memory card reader icon.
In the right–hand pane, highlight the icon for the required version of the IOS.
Drag and drop the IOS icon to the CF memory card reader icon to copy it to the CF memory card.
If an additional file in the LMF computer directory must be moved to the CF memory card, perform
the following:
9a
– In the right–hand pane, highlight one additional file which is to be moved to the CF memory card.
9b
– While holding down the Ctrl key on the LMF computer, drag and drop the highlighted file into
the CF memory card reader directory in the left–hand pane.
9c
– If additional files in the directory must be placed on the CF memory card, repeat steps 9a and 9b
for each file until all files have been moved one at a time from the LMF computer to the CF
memory card.
10
In the left–hand pane, highlight the CF memory card reader icon.
11
Verify that all required files were moved to the CF memory card by checking the filenames in the
right–hand pane.
12
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the LMF computer directory where the
required IOS version and canned configuration files are stored.
13
Highlight the directory in the left–hand pane.
14
If this procedure was entered from step 17 of Table J-8, return to Table J-8, step 18.
15
If no other file transfer activities between the LMF computer and CF memory card are required at this
time, click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
16
Remove the CF memory card from the card reader and install it in the BTS router by following the
procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide .
17
At this point, the router should be powered up and displaying the user EXEC prompt in the
HyperTerminal window of the LMF computer communication session. If it is not, perform steps 1
through 6 of Table J-8.
18
At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
. . . continued on next page
J-46
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-11: Using a CF Memory Card Reader for Replacing
Loaded IOS Version and Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
NOTE
The IOS present working directory defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the
present working directory has been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working
directory by entering pwd . If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd
slot0: to return to the default setting.
19
Display the directory listing of the CF memory card by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
20
Be sure the IOS file is the first file listed in the directory content display. If it is not, perform the
procedure in Table J-12, and then return to step 21, below.
21
Verify the router will boot properly on the IOS and revised startup–config files by entering the
following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
22
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
23
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
24
Verify the router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > prompt or error messages related to port
configurations.
25
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
25a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
25b
– Disconnect all cabling from the BTS router.
25c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-47
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Change CF Memory Card File Sequence to Place IOS File First on the Card
This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped with a CF
memory card reader to perform the following activities:
1. Change the sequence of files on a CF memory card to place the IOS
version file first
2. Formatting the CF memory card, if necessary, to achieve the
required file sequence positioning of the IOS version file
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for CF
memory card reader file transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in Table J-8 and steps 1 through 5 of
Table J-9
S Copies of the required IOS version and canned configuration files are
loaded into the desired directory of the LMF computer
Optional equipment/software
If they are available, the following items may be used to change the CF
memory card file sequence once the card is installed in the BTS router:
S Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
S A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
Changing CF memory card file sequence
Follow the procedure in Table J-12 to place the installed IOS version file
first in the stored file sequence on the CF memory card.
J-48
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
Action
CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place the listed
file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix directory listing
commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This procedure is intended for use only
with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list directory contents alphabetically.
This procedure assumes that the LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for CF memory
card reader file transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the procedures in
Table J-8 and steps 1 through 5 of Table J-9. If necessary, perform these procedures now.
NOTE
The IOS present working directory defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the
present working directory has been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working
directory by entering pwd . If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd
slot0: to return to the default setting.
With the CF memory card still installed in the router, display a CF memory card directory listing if
one is not showing by entering the dir command. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Router#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
2212
7051976
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
canned–config
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)
Router#
Verify that the IOS file is not the first file on the CF memory card.
If a tftp server application is not available on the LMF computer, skip to step 23.
If a tftp server is available on the LMF computer, connect the Ethernet crossover cable as shown in
Figure J-4.
If it has not been done, configure the LMF computer NIC as directed in Table J-4.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-49
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
7a
Action
Configure FE port FE 0 (fa0/0) by performing the following:
– At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC
mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
7b
– At the Router# privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure
submode:
configure terminal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
7c
– At the global configuration mode prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the
Enter key after each command:
hostname btsrtr1
interface fa0/0
ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
speed 100
duplex full
no shutdown
line con 0
exec–timeout 0 0
no login
line vty 0 4
no login
Responses similar to the following will be displayed:
Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1
BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0
BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100
BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex full
BTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdown
BTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#
7d
– Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the privileged EXEC mode prompt by
holding down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl+z). A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
J-50
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
7e
Action
– Verify port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP address by entering the following:
show ip interface brief
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ip int br
Interface
IP Address
OK?
FastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2 YES
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
FastEthernet0/1 unassigned
YES
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
Status
up
administratively down
administratively down
administratively down
Protocol
up
down
down
down
BTSRTR1#
Be sure the required IOS file and canned configuration file for the BTS router are located in the tftp
server root directory (refer to Table J-4, step 14 or step 17, as applicable)
Delete files from the CF memory card by entering the del filename command. A response similar to
the following will be displayed:
Router#del canned–config
Delete filename [canned–config]?
10
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [canned–config]?
Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]
11
Press the Enter key to confirm the deletion.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [canned–config]?
Delete slot0:canned–config? [confirm]
Router#
12
Confirm the file deletion by entering the dir command. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24887818 bytes free)
Router#
13
Repeat steps 9 through 12 for each file until all files have been deleted from the CF memory card.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-51
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
Action
14
Use the tftp server to copy the IOS file from the LMF computer to the CF memory card by enteringthe following:
copy tftp:IOS_filename slot0:
Where IOS_filenamer = required IOS version filename in the LMF computer tftp server root
directory.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []?
15
At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
16
At the prompt for the destination filename, press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!
[OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]
7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
. . . continued on next page
J-52
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
17
Action
Display the directory of the CF memory card to confirm the IOS file transfer by entering the dir
command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (248880440 bytes free)
Router#
18
Copy the canned configuration file to the CF memory card by entering the following:
copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config
Where color = blue or red, as applicable.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
19
If the default IP address for the LMF computer displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key
to accept it. If it is missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is accepted:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
2212 bytes copied in 0.208 secs
Router#
20
At the prompt for the destination filename, press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): !
[OK – 2457/4096 bytes]
2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
21
Determine if the IOS file is now the first file displayed in the directory listing by entering the dir
command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24878228 bytes free)
Router#
22
If the IOS file is the first file displayed, as shown in step 21, above, proceed to step 30.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-53
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
23
Action
If the IOS is not the first file displayed, as shown in step 2, above, format the CF memory card by
entering the following:
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
24
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
25
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
BTSRTR1#
26
If a tftp server is available on the LMF computer, repeat steps 14 through 22 to transfer the IOS and
canned configuration files to the CF memory card.
27
Once the format operation is completed, remove the CF memory card from the router following the
procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS FRU Guide , insert it in the card reader connected to the LMF
computer, and copy the IOS file to the card by performing step 4 and steps 6 through 11 of Table J-11,
as required.
28
Remove the CF memory card from the card reader and install it in the router following the procedure
in the BTS FRU Guide.
29
Be sure that the IOS file is now the first file displayed in the directory listing by entering the dir
command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
30
J-54
If this procedure was entered from step 5 of Table J-9, return to Table J-9, step 6.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Replacing Installed BTS Router CF Memory Card IOS Version
Table J-12: Use CF Memory Card Reader to Place IOS File
First in CF Memory Card File Sequence
Step
Action
31
If this procedure was entered from step 20 of Table J-11, return to Table J-11, step 21.
32
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
32a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
32b
– Disconnect all cabling from the BTS router.
32c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
33
If a tftp server was used in this procedure and no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed,
change the NIC IP address and subnet mask back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in
Table J-4, step 9b.
CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-55
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
Introduction
BTS routers are supplied pre–loaded with a version of the ROM monitor
(rommon) low–level operating system. Along with the IOS version, the
loaded rommon version should be verified as being the one required for
the network. Procedures in this section are used to verify the loaded
rommon version, and, if necessary, change it to the required version.
Methods are provided for using either a tftp server or CF memory card
reader to transfer the required rommon version to a BTS router’s CF
memory card.
Equipment and Software Required for Verification
The following items are required to perform rommon verification:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in this manual.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers equipped
with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows 98 SE and using
the FAT16 file system will not operate properly, resulting in a
complete site outage.
S Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
S A copy of the MWR 1941 router rommon version required for the
network where the routers are to be installed
NOTE
Contact the network administrator or the Motorola Account
Team for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy of the
required rommon version.
S A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
J-56
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Method 1: In–Router Verification and Replacement of Installed rommon
Version
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped with a tftp
server application to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the rommon version loaded and running on a BTS router
2. Replace the rommon version installed in a BTS router
Additional required equipment/software
For this method, the following equipment and software application is
required in addition to the common items required for both methods:
S Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
S A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp file
transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table J-4, Table J-5, Table J-6, and steps 1 through 8 of
Table J-7
S A copy of the required rommon version is loaded into the tftp default
directory of the LMF computer
Verifying and replacing installed rommon version
Follow the procedure in Table J-13 to verify and, if necessary, replace
the installed rommon version using the tftp server application.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-57
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in Table J-4, Table J-5, Table J-6, and steps 1
through 4 of Table J-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.
Determine the currently installed rommon version by entering the following at the router privileged
EXEC mode prompt:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT
SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
To determine the currently installed rommon version, examine the ROM: System Bootstrap line in the
response.
. . . continued on next page
J-58
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
Compare the installed rommon version information with the filename of the rommon version required
for the network.
NOTE
1. Rommon filename format is similar to the following:
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
2. The rommon filename reflects the version number of the software (122–8r.MC3).
If the installed version is the one required for the network skip to step 26.
If the installed rommon version is not the one required for the network, backup the current BTS router
configuration to the LMF computer by entering the following:
copy nvram:startup–config tftp
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy nvram:start tftp
Address or name of remote host []?
NOTE
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy copy nvram:start tftp
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Source filename [startup–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [startup–config]?
Destination filename [startup–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-59
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
10
Action
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd . If
the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default
setting.
Determine the amount of memory available (bytes free) on the CF memory card by entering the dir
command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
11
Be sure there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.
NOTE
A rommon version file requires approximately 0.7 MB.
12
Begin to copy the required version of the rommon file from the LMF computer to the BTS router by entering
the following:
copy tftp:new_rommon_filename slot0:
Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required rommon version for the BTS router.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
13
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer. A response similar to the
following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
14
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
. . . continued on next page
J-60
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
15
Action
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is not
correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default
filename is selected:
Destination filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin...
Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 614306/14103552 bytes]
614306 bytes copied in 13.059 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
16
Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new rommon version file is there by entering
the dir command. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
614306
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
Dec 13 2002 14:59:36
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
31932416 bytes total (24263922 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
17
Replace the existing rommon version with the new one copied to the CF memory card by entering the
following:
upgrade rom–monitor file slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no]
18
When prompted to continue, enter yes and press the Enter key. A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no] yes
ROMMON image upgrade in progress
Erasing boot flash
eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Programming boot flash pppp
Now reloading
19
When the router has completed initialization, change to the router privileged EXEC mode by entering
the following:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1>enable
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-61
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
20
Action
Verify the router has initialized with the new rommon version by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following partial response will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(8r)MC3 RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
21
Compare the version displayed in the response ROM: System Bootstrap line to the filename of the
new rommon version file copied to the CF memory card.
22
If the router successfully rebooted with the new rommon version, the rommon file can be deleted from
the CF memory card by entering the following:
delete slot0:new_rommon_filename
Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required rommon version copied to the CF
memory card in steps 12 through 15, above.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
23
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed if the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
24
Press the Enter key to confirm the deletion. A response similar to the following will be displayed if
the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
BTSRTR1#
CAUTION
In this step, do not delete the IOS and canned–config files from the CF memory card. The BTS router
must have these files on the card to properly boot or switch between packet and circuit mode.
25
If additional unnecessary files, such as a backup of the startup–config file, are also on the CF
memory card, delete them by repeating steps 22 through 24 for each file.
26
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
26a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
26b
– Disconnect all cabling from the BTS router.
26c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
. . . continued on next page
J-62
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-13: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
27
Action
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table J-4, step 9b.
CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
Method 2: Verification and Replacement of Installed rommon Version Using
a CF Memory Card Reader
Description
This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped with a CF
memory card reader to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the rommon version loaded and running on a BTS router
2. Replace the rommon version installed in a BTS router
Additional required equipment/software
For this method, the following equipment item and associated software
is required in addition to the common items required for both methods:
S CF memory card reader device and software driver for the operating
system installed on the LMF computer
CAUTION
Card readers for other non–volatile, solid–state memory devices
such as Smart Media cards will not work with the CF memory
cards used in the MWR 1941 routers. Do not attempt to use a
card reader intended for another type of memory device.
Prerequisites
The following are required prior to performing this procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for CF
memory card reader file transfer and are operating as they would be
after performing the procedures in steps 1 through 8 of Table J-8
S A copy of the required rommon version is loaded into the desired
directory of the LMF computer
File operations using a CF memory card reader
Only file transfers should be performed using the CF memory card
reader. CF memory card formatting should be performed in a BTS router
using a HyperTerminal connection. Attempting to format a CF memory
card from a Windows–based computer using a card reader could result in
unpredictable BTS router operation.
CAUTION
Oct 2003
Do not format BTS router CF memory cards using a
Windows–based computer. Only format CF memory cards in a
BTS router.
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-63
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Verifying and replacing installed rommon version
Follow the procedure in Table J-14 to verify and, if necessary replace the
installed rommon version using a CF memory card reader.
Table J-14: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in steps 1 through 8 of Table J-8. If necessary,
perform these procedures now.
Determine the currently installed rommon version by entering the following at the router privileged
EXEC mode prompt:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE
SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT
SOFTWARE
ROM: 1941 Software (MWR1941–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1941 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
J-64
To determine the currently installed rommon version, examine the ROM: System Bootstrap line in
the response.
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-14: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
Compare the installed rommon version information with the filename of the rommon version required
for the network.
NOTE
1. Rommon filename format is similar to the following:
MWR1941_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
2. The rommon filename reflects the version number of the software (122–8r.MC3).
If the installed version is the one required for the network skip to step 25.
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd . If
the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default
setting.
If the installed rommon version is not the one required for the network, determine the amount of
memory available (bytes free) on the CF memory card by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
Be sure there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.
NOTE
A rommon version file requires approximately 0.7 MB, and space must also be available for a backup
of the router’s startup–config file.
Create a backup of the current BTS router configuration on the CF memory card by entering the
following:
copy nvram:startup–config slot:0
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy nvram:startup–config slot0:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2212 bytes copied in 4.96 secs (553 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
10
Oct 2003
Remove the CF memory card from the router by following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS
FRU Guide .
. . . continued on next page
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-65
Verify and Upgrade rommon Version
68P09258A31–A
Table J-14: Verify and Replace Installed rommon Version Using a CF Memory Card Reader
Step
Action
11
Insert the CF memory card into the card reader as specified by the card reader manufacturer’s
instructions.
12
On the LMF computer, click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
13
NOTE
The CF memory card reader will appear as a disk drive in Windows Explorer with a disk drive letter
and icon.
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the CF memory card.
14
In the left–hand pane of WindowsExplorer, highlight the CF memory card icon.
15
In the right–hand pane, verify the files displayed in step 6, above, appear.
16
Scroll the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer to locate the icon for the directory where the required
rommon version file is stored.
17
In the right–hand pane, highlight the startup–config file on the CF memory card, note its file size,
and drag it to the icon for the directory where the required rommon version file is stored.
NOTE
After highlighting the startup–config file in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary to scroll the
left–hand pane to see the directory icon where the required rommon version file is stored before
dragging the file.
18
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the required rommon version file is stored.
19
In the right–hand pane, verify the startup–config file is in the directory and the file size is the
same as the original on the CF memory card.
20
In the right–hand pane, highlight the required rommon version file to be transferred to the CF memory
card and drag it to the CF memory card disk drive icon.
NOTE
After highlighting the rommon version file in the right–hand pane, it may be necessary to scroll the
left–hand pane to see the CF memory card disk drive icon before dragging the file.
21
Verify the rommon version file has been copied to the CF memory card by clicking on the CF memory
card disk drive icon in the left–hand pane, and being sure that the rommon version file appears in the
in the right–hand pane.
22
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
23
Remove the CF memory card with the rommon version file from the card reader.
24
Install the CF memory card in the BTS router by following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS
FRU Guide .
25
Proceed to Replace installed rommon version, below.
J-66
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
Introduction
ROM monitor boot conditions
Under certain circumstances the BTS router will initialize with the ROM
monitor (rommon) operating system rather than the IOS. These
circumstances include:
IOS file is missing from the CF memory card
IOS file is not the first file on the CF memory card
IOS file image on the CF memory card is corrupted
Startup–config file contains an outdated boot system line specifying
an IOS file which has been replaced with an updated version
S Startup–config file contains boot system line with typographical
error(s) in the IOS filename
Description
Router operation on rommon is signalled by the display of the rommon
# > prompt, where # is a number which increments each time a
command is issued. Rommon is a low–level operating system which
provides limited capabilities for router testing and troubleshooting
operations, but does not support any operations on files beyond viewing
directory contents or booting from a specified file. As a result, files can
not be copied or deleted when the router is operating on rommon.
Recovery methods
Two recovery methods are included in this section. The first is the
simplest and requires that a valid, uncorrupted IOS version is installed
on the CF memory card. The second method requires additional
equipment and must be used in instances such as when an IOS file is not
installed on the CF memory card or the installed IOS image is corrupted.
Simple Recovery from Boot to rommon
Requirements
Unless it is certain, that the IOS image on the CF memory card is
corrupted, this method should always be the first attempted to recover
the router from a rommon initialization. This method does not require
any additional equipment beyond the items necessary to load canned
configuration files into the BTS router. To be effective, this method does
require that a valid, uncorrupted IOS image file is installed on the
router’s CF memory card.
Recovery
Follow the procedure in Table J-15 to attempt a simple recovery from a
BTS router rommon initialization.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-67
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer is set up and connected to the BTS router with an active
HyperTerminal communication session. If it is not, follow the procedure in Table J-2 to establish a
HyperTerminal communication session.
With the rommon 1 > prompt displayed in the HyperTerminal window, enter the following to identify
the IOS file on the CF memory card:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
2212
–rw–
canned–config
7051976
–rw–
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
rommon 2 >
. . . continued on next page
J-68
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
Action
Note the IOS filename, and enter the following to begin recovery to an IOS boot:
boot slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 2, above.
A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similar
to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
00031A
MEMORY_REQ
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
Press RETURN to get started!
If the router successfully reboots with the IOS, proceed to step 7.
If the router does not reboot with the IOS, perform the following:
5a
– Scroll the HyperTerminal display down until the directory display from step 2, above, is visible.
5b
– Compare the IOS filename from the directory display with the filename entered in performing step
3, above.
5c
– If the filename was typed incorrectly, repeat step 3, using care to type the filename correctly.
If the router does not reboot with the IOS after typing the filename correctly, proceed to Table J-16 and
perform the extended recovery procedure.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-69
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
Action
CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
After a successful reboot with IOS, perform the following to correct the cause of the boot to rommon:
7a
– Enter the dir slot0: command to display the CF memory card directory, and, if the IOS file is
not the first file listed, perform the procedure in Table J-10, steps 25 through 32, or Table J-12, as
applicable, to correct the situation.
7b
– If the IOS file is the first file, enter the following command to display the contents of the
startup–config file:
show startup–config
A response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.07132002.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
7c
– If the file listing contains a “boot system” line, examine it for the correct IOS filename.
7d
– If the boot system slot0: filename is incorrect, enter the following, using care to type the filename
correctly:
boot system slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 2, above.
7e
– Replace the boot system line in the startup–config file with the line entered in step 7d, above, by
entering the following:
copy runing–config startup–config
. . . continued on next page
J-70
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-15: Simple Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
7f
Action
– Verify the correct IOS filename is now included in the listing by entering the following:
show startup–config
A response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
7g
– If the filename is correctly written, enter the following to determine if the router will reboot to
IOS:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
10
After a successful reboot with IOS, proceed with other BTS router activities or remove power from the
router and disconnect it
11
If the router still will not successfully boot with IOS, proceed to Table J-16 and perform the extended
recovery procedure.
Extended Recovery from Boot to rommon
Requirements
If rommon boot recovery attempts fail using the simple recovery
method, this method must be used to reboot a BTS router which has
initialized with rommon. This method requires additional equipment
beyond the items necessary to load canned configuration files into the
BTS router. Extended recovery requires formatting the CF memory card
from the rommon–initialized router and reloading the reformatted CF
memory card with the required IOS version.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-71
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Additional equipment required
An additional, formatted, 32 MB CF memory card with the required
version of the IOS installed is required in addition to the equipment and
software required for BTS router canned configuration installation. This
card may be:
S A spare CF memory card which is loaded with the required IOS
version
S A CF memory card from an additional BTS router which is loaded
with the required IOS version
Recovery
Follow the procedure in Table J-15 to perform an extended recovery
from a BTS router rommon initialization.
Table J-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
Action
This procedure assumes the BTS router is powered and operating on rommon with the LMF computer
set up and connected to the router with an active HyperTerminal communication session. If it is not,
follow the procedure in Table J-2 to establish a HyperTerminal communication session.
Remove the CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in the 1X SC 4812T BTS
FRU Guide .
Install the additional CF memory card in the router following the procedure in the BTS FRU Guide.
Enter the following to obtain the filename of the IOS version loaded on the CF memory card:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
7051976
–rw–
mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
rommon 2 >
Note the exact filename displayed for the IOS version.
. . . continued on next page
J-72
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
Action
Enter the following to initialize the router with the IOS on the additional CF memory card:
boot slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 5, above.
A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similar
to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1941–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
MEMORY_REQ
00031A
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1941 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
––– System Configuration Dialog –––
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: n
If the router prompts with a question to enter the initial dialog as shown in step 6, above, type no and
press the Enter key to obtain the user EXEC mode prompt.
If the router prompts with Press RETURN to get started!, press the Enter key to obtain the user
EXEC mode prompt.
At the user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router> enable
Router#
10
Remove the additional CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in the 1X SC
4812T BTS FRU Guide .
11
Install the original CF memory card in the router following the procedure in the BTS FRU Guide.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-73
Recovery From BTS Router Boot to rommon
68P09258A31–A
Table J-16: Extended Recovery from BTS Router rommon Boot
Step
12
Action
Format the original CF memory card by entering the following:
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
13
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
14
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation. A response similar to the following will be
displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
Router#
15
Copy the required IOS version to the formatted original CF memory card by performing one of the
following:
S Use the LMF computer and a tftp server following the procedure in Table J-10
S Use the LMF computer and a CF memory card reader following the procedure in Table J-11
16
If applicable, perform IOS initialization troubleshooting as described in Table J-15, steps 7 through 10.
J-74
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
It may be necessary to enter or change the IP addresses and/or operating
parameters for BTS router FE interfaces FE 0 and FE1 without making
other changes in the router configuration files. Procedures in this section
cover these operations.
Prerequisites
The following must be accomplished before entering or changing BTS
router FE port IP addresses and/or operating parameters:
S The user has read and understands the content of MWR1941 Wireless
Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number
78–13983–01
S BTS routers must have the required version of the IOS saved on their
installed CF memory card
S BTS routers must have power applied, be operating without alarms
other than span alarms, and have completed boot–up to the user EXEC
mode prompt (BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>)
S The BTS router privileged EXEC mode password has been obtained
from the network administrator
Entering or Changing FE Interface IP Addresses
To enter or change FE interface IP addresses, follow the procedure in
Table J-17.
Table J-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses & Operating Parameters
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1941 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Obtain the correct IP addresses and subnet masks for the BTS router FE interfaces from the network
administrator.
If a HyperTerminal connection for BTS card/module MMI or BTS router (BTSRTR) communication
has not been created, create one as described in Table J-1 of this appendix.
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router, and start a communication session as described in
Table J-2 in this appendix.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-75
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
Table J-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses & Operating Parameters
Step
Action
NOTE
Examples in this procedure show prompts for BTSRTR–bts#–1–1 and BTSRTR–bts#–1–2, but the
procedure can be used for any router in any BTS router group or a router running the canned
configuration file (BTSRTR1 or BTSRTR2).
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC
mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
Enter the privileged EXEC mode password. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# privileged EXEC mode prompt, display the FE interface IP addresses by
typing:
show ip interface brief
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# show ip interface brief
Interface
IP Address
OK?
Method
Status
Protocol
FastEthernet0/0
192.168.146.1 YES
NVRAM
up
up
Serial0:0
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
FastEthernet0/1
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
Serial1:0
unassigned
YES
unset
administratively down
down
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
For a FastEthernet0/0 (fa0/0) or FastEthernet0/1(fa0/1) interface which does not have a correct or an
assigned IP address, enter the following at the router prompt to access the global configuration mode:
configure terminal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
. . . continued on next page
J-76
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
Table J-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses & Operating Parameters
Step
Action
At the global configure mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure interface submode
for the interface requiring IP address assignment/change:
interface fastethernetinterface#
Where interface# = 0/0 or 0/1, as applicable.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)# int fa0/1
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
At the configure interface submode prompt, assign or change the interface IP address by entering:
ip address IP_addr subnet_mask
Where:
IP_addr = the required IP address for the interface; for example, 192.168.147.1
subnet_mask = the required subnet mask for the interface; for example, 255.255.255.0
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ip address
192.168.147.1
255.255.255.0
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
10
To complete configuration of the interface, enter the following parameter settings, one at a time,
pressing Enter after each:
duplex full
speed 100
keepalive 1
no shutdown
11
Return to the global configuration mode by entering the exit command. A response similar to the
following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# exit
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
12
If the IP address and/or parameters for the other FE interface on the router must be assigned or
changed at this time, repeat steps 8 through 11 for the other FE interface.
13
Once the correct parameters have been set for all FE interfaces, return to the privileged EXEC mode
prompt by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl +z). A response similar to the following
will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the interface
configuration and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.
. . . continued on next page
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-77
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
Table J-17: Enter/Change BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses & Operating Parameters
Step
14
Action
Save the interface configuration changes to the startup configuration file on the CF memory card by
entering the following:
copy running–config startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
15
copy run start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
Press Enter. A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run start
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?
Building configuration...
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK]
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
16
If all FE IP address entries/changes for the router are complete, enter the following to return the router
to user EXEC mode:
disable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>
disable
17
If no other router requires the FE interfaces to be assigned/changed, proceed to step 20.
18
If FE interfaces on another router must be assigned/changed, disconnect the 8–contact modular plug
from the current router CONSOLE port and connect it to the CONSOLE port of the other router.
19
Press the Enter key, and when the router user EXEC mode prompt appears repeat steps 3 through 16
for the other router.
20
When the router is in user EXEC mode, close the HyperTerminal session and disconnect the LMF
computer and additional components from the BTS router.
J-78
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
BTS Router Canned Configuration File
This section presents listings of the blue and red router canned
configuration file contents for the MWR 1941 BTS routers. The blue
router is the primary router on the BTS LAN subnet 192.168.146.0, and
the red router is the primary on BTS LAN subnet 192.168.147.0. The
canned configuration files allow communication with the BTS routers
for both on–site FE cabling connectivity verification and for
downloading the routers from the network with the full, site–specific
operational configuration.
Obtaining the Latest Configuration File Content
The files included here are for example only. The correct canned
configuration file content for each BTS router should be generated at the
OMC–R using the /screl/active/bin/gen_btsrtr_canned_config.ksh script.
Configuration File Examples
Examples of both configuration files are provided in the following
subsections.
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-79
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
“Blue” BTS Router Canned Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR1
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
no logging console
ip subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
disable–eadi
redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
clock source line
channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
J-80
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
login
password cisco
end
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-81
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
68P09258A31–A
“Red” BTS Router Canned Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR2
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR2
no logging console
ip subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
disable–eadi
redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
clock source line
channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
J-82
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
Entering or Changing Router FE Interface IP Address
! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the MWR 1941 health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the MWR 1941 revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
login
password cisco
end
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
J-83
Preparation for Site Turn–over
68P09258A31–A
Preparation for Site Turn–over
Prepare the BTS site for turn–over to the control of the OMC–R by
performing the procedures in Table J-18 and Table J-19.
Table J-18: Prepare for Site Turn–over
Step
Action
After disconnecting it from the BTS router, shut down the LMF computer.
If any additional external support equipment was used during the installation process, shut it down,
disconnect it from the frame.
Account for all tools used and parts removed from the frame during the installation, being sure none
were left inside the frame.
Visually inspect the frame for any foreign objects left inside, and remove any discovered.
Visually inspect all cable connections, ensuring they are connected as required for normal BTS
operation.
Be sure all internal frame cables are routed and secured to prevent damage to them when the frame
doors are closed.
Be sure all external frame and BTS router cables are routed and secured so they will not interfere with
normal maintenance and operational activities at the site.
Be sure the BTS routers are powered up and not reporting alarms other than span alarms.
Returning the Site to OMC–R Control
Follow the procedure in Table J-19 to return the site to OMC–R control.
Table J-19: Returning the Site to Operational Control
Step
Action
Contact the OMC–R, and notify the operator the installation is complete. Request notification from
the operator when the routers have been downloaded with the full site–specific configurations and are
verified as functioning normally.
When notified router operation has been verified and the OMC–R can assume control of the site,
perform the following:
2a
– On any frames which were opened, close and secure the cabinet doors.
2b
– Verify no alarm conditions are being reported to the OMC–R with the frame doors closed.
2c
– Prepare all equipment, tools, and parts removed from the frame for transport from the site.
What to Do Next
The installation of the Packet Backhaul option is complete. When the
site is secured, there are no further actions to perform at the BTS site.
J-84
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Index
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-1
Index
68P09258A31–A
Numbers
AMR, No control, 6-17
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-8
LMF to BTS connection, 3-17
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,
A-18
1700 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-8
Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-15
1700 MHz PCS Channels, E-7
Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-2
1900 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-3
Antenna Map, 3-104
800 MHz CDMA Channels, E-5
ATP, 4-2
generate report, 4-16
Report, 4-16
test matrix/detailed optimization, C-3
Test Prerequisites, 4-5
Test Procedure, 4-9
800 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-5
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure, 4-2
ACTIVE LED
GLI2, 6-23
MCC, 6-27
Backplane DIP switch settings, 2-4
1900 MHz PCS Channels, E-2
2–way Splitter, 1-11
3C–PC–COMBO CBL, 1-8
Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-7
Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address,
F-8
Advantest R3465, 3-57
Calibrating Test Cable, F-24
Advantest R3465 Communications Test Set GPIB
Address, F-12
Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address,
F-9
Agilent 8935 Series E6380 (formerly HP 8935) Test
Set GPIB Address, F-10
Agilent E4406A, calibration, F-27
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address,
F-6
Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address, F-7
Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC
4850/4850E, 3-121
ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-23
Alarm Monitor window, 3-120
alarm redundancy tests, BBX2, 3-114
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-120
BBX2
alarm redundancy tests, 3-114
Connector, 6-15
gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-2
No control in the shelf, 6-17
BLO
Calibration, 3-85
Calibration Audit, 3-94
calibration data file, 3-86
Calibration Failure, 6-7
Download, 3-94
BTS
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-33
LMF connection, 3-16, 3-17
system software download, 3-4
test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-17
when to optimize, C-2
BTS frame
DC Distribution Pre–test, 2-10
DC Power Pre–test, 2-8
initial power–up, 2-15
BTS login, GUI environment, 3-26
BTS router communication session, establishing, J-6
BTS router connections, programming, J-7
Alarm tests, redundancy, 3-109
Alarm/Redundancy Tests, Distribution Shelf, 3-113
Create CAL File, 3-98
All Cal/Audit procedure, 3-92
All Cal/Audit Test, 3-97
C–CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-14, 6-15
Index-2
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Index
68P09258A31–A
C–CCP Shelf, 1-21
Site Serial Number Check List, A-19
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-10
Cable
GPIB, 1-10
LAN Cable, 1-10
Null Modem, 3-45
Setting Loss Values, 3-83
Timimg Reference, 1-10
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-9
Cable Calibration
HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236), F-19
Manual, F-19
CDI Alarm
with Alarms Test Box, 3-122
without Alarms Test Box, 3-124
cable calibration, automatic, test set–up
Agilent 8935, 3-61
Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-63
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-2
preliminary operations, 2-2
types, 3-3
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-9
CDF, 3-3
site equipage verification, 3-4
site type and equipage data information, 2-2
CAL File, 3-98
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Calculating Center Frequencies
1700 MHz, E-8
1900 MHz, E-3
800 MHz, E-5
CF Memory Card, J-13
Load, J-15, J-29
Channel elements, No or missing, 6-18
Calibrate Test Cabling
Communications System Analyzer, 3-80
Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer, 3-81
Calibrating, Test Equipment, 3-78
Channels
1700 MHz, E-7
1900 MHz, E-2
800 MHz, E-5
Checksum Failure, 6-12
Calibrating Cables, Overview, 3-79
Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-24
Calibration
BLO, 3-85
Cable, 1-6
data file, BLO, 3-86
In–Service, H-16
RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-89
RFDS, 3-106
Test Equipment, 1-6
TX Path, 3-86, 3-89
CIO, Connectors, 6-15
CLI, 3-25
Format Conventions, 3-25
Logging Out, 3-30
Clock Sync Module. See CSM
Cobra RFDS
external housing, 1-35
RF connector panel detail, 1-35
Code Domain Power, 4-7
Test Cable Calibration, 1-6
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10
Test Equipment Calibration, 1-6
Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5
Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-8
Command Line Interface, 3-25
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-4
command terminal, settings, J-3
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-3
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-4
Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-5
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-5
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-6
Cannot load BLO, 6-8
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-3
Oct 2003
Common power supply verification, 2-14
communications test set, TX acceptance tests, 4-6
configure tftp server application, J-19
Connect LMF computer to BTS router, J-19
Connector Functionality, Backplane,
Troubleshooting, 6-14
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-3
Index
68P09258A31–A
Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 5-2
Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-3
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-15
Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11
E4406A, calibration, F-27
Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,
5-2
Enable
CSMs, 3-41
MCCs, 3-42
Redundant GLIs, 3-42
Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-3
CSM
Clock Source, 3-40
clock source, select, 3-40
Enable, 3-41
frequency verification, 3-45
functions, 3-43
LEDs, 3-43
MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-47
redundancy/alarm tests, 3-116
Reference Source Configuration Error, 6-12
Troubleshooting, 6-12, 6-13
CSM clock source, select, 3-40
Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, I-3
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-33
Transceiver, 1-8
Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,
3-17
External Test Equipment Removal, 5-4
Folder Structure Overview, 3-7
Foreword, xxi
CyberTest, 3-57
Frame Error Rate, 4-8
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-23
Data Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5
DC Power Pre–test
+27 V BTS frame detail, 2-8
–48 V BTS frame detail, 2-10
BTS Frame, 2-6
RFDS, 2-12
RFDS detail, 2-12
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-11
Frequency Spectrum
Korean PCS (1700 MHz), E-7
North American Cellular Telephone System (800
MHz), E-5
North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-2
DC Power Problems, 6-19
Gain set point, BBX, D-2
DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-21
General Safety, xxiii
Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-6
Generating an ATP Report, 4-16
Digital Control Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-16
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address, F-15
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-5
Digital Multimeter, 1-10
Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-57
Directional Coupler, 1-10
GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group
Line Interface
Distribution shelf, alarm/redundancy tests, 3-113
GLI2
Connector, 6-15
Ethernet Connections, 6-15
LED Status, 6-23
No Control through span line connection, 6-16
No Control via LMF, 6-16
Download
BLO, 3-94
BTS, 3-35
BTS system software, 3-4
Non–MGLI2 Devices, 3-39
ROM Code, G-2
GPIB, set address, HP 437B, F-14
Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-38
GPIB Cable, 1-10
Index-4
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Index
68P09258A31–A
GPIB Address
Advantest R3267, F-8
Advantest R3465, F-12
Advantest R3562, F-9
Agilent (formerly HP) 8935, F-10
Agilent E4406A, F-6
Agilent E4432B, F-7
Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter, F-15
Hewlett Packard HP8921a & HP83236A/B, F-11
Motorola CyberTest, F-13
GPIB Interface Box, RS232, F-16
GPS
Initialization/Verification, 3-48
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
redundancy alarm tests, 3-116
Test Equipment Setup, 3-46
GPS Bad RX Message Type, 6-12
I and Q values, B-2
In–Service Calibration, H-13, H-16
Individual ATP Test Background
Code Domain Power/Noise Floor, 4-13
Pilot Time Offset, 4-13
RX Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-14
Tx Mask, 4-11
Waveform Quality (Rho), 4-12
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-3
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-4
Initial power–up
BTS frame, 2-15
RFDS, 2-15
Initialization/Verification
GPS, 3-48
HSO, 3-54
LFR, 3-52
GPS satellite system, 3-41
Graphical User Interface, 3-19
GUI, 3-19
Logging Out, 3-29
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, C-3
IP Addresses, Agilent E7495A, 3-75
IOS Version Verification, J-13
IS–97 specification, B-2
Hardware Requirements, 1-7
Hewlett Packard HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB
Address, F-11
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-11
ISB connectors, 6-14
Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-15
Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-11
High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-10
HP 437, setting GPIB address, F-14
LAN
BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-33
Tester, 1-11
HP 437B, 3-57
HP 83236 A, F-19
LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
HP 83236A, F-18
LED, CSM, 3-43
HP 8921, 3-57
LED Status, 6-21
BBX2, 6-27
CSM, 6-22
DC/DC Converter, 6-21
GLI2, 6-23
LPA, 6-28
MCC, 6-27
HP 8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-18
HP 8935, 3-57
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual
Testing, F-23
HP Test Set, VSWR, I-3
HSO
Initialization/Verification, 3-54
redundancy/alarm tests, 3-116
LFR
Initialization / Verification, 3-52
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-7
redundancy/alarm tests, 3-116
HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-44
LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-46
HyperTerminal Connection, Creating, 3-13
LIF, Load Information File, 3-9
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-5
Index
68P09258A31–A
Line Build Out parameters
configure, 5-6
verify, 5-5
LMF, 3-6
1X FER acceptance test, 4-6
BTS connection, 3-17
Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,
illustration, 3-17
Installation and Update Procedures, 3-10
platform requirements, 1-7
to BTS connection, 3-16, 3-17
TX acceptance tests, 4-6
LMF BTS displays, 3-19
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-23
GLI2, 6-24
MCC, 6-27
MMI equipment setup, 3-32
MMI Interface Kit, 1-9
Module status indicators, 6-21
Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address, F-13
Multi–FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-11
NAM, Valid Ranges, 3-103
LMF computer and software, 1-7
NECF, 3-3
LMF Operation, 3-18
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-19
LMF Removal, 5-8
Load Information File, 3-9
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-20
Loading Code, 3-35
No GPS Reference Source, 6-12
Local Maintenance Facility. See LMF
Non–GLI2, Download, 3-39
Logging In to a BTS, 3-26
Null Modem Cable, 3-45
Logging Out, 3-29
CLI, 3-30
GUI, 3-29
Online Help, 3-32
Logical BTS, 1-15
Numbering, 1-16
Optimization
Process, 3-2
purpose, 1-4
When, 1-5
Login, GUI, 3-26
Login Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-3
Optional Test Equipment, 1-11
frequency counter, 1-11
LPA
redundancy test, 3-118
test data sheets
convergence, A-9
IM Reduction, A-8
Oscilloscope, 1-11
LPA Module LED, 6-28
PA Shelves, 1-22
LPAs, Site Serial Number Check List, A-20
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,
3-17
Pilot Gain, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14
Manual, overview, 1-3
Pilot Time Offset, 4-7
Manual Scope and Layout, 1-2
Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-126
MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-23
Ping, 3-33
MCC, Enable, 3-42
PN Offset
programming information, B-2
usage, B-2
MGLI, redundancy test RFM frame, 3-119
MGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-6
Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-6
MMI Connection, 3-31
Index-6
PnMask, I and PnMask Q Values, B-3
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only), Site
Serial Number Check List, A-20
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Index
68P09258A31–A
Power Delta Calibration
Advantest, H-5
HP8921A, H-3
HP8935, H-8
RF
Adapters, 1-10
Attenuators, 1-10
Load, 1-10
Power Input, 6-14
RF Path Calibration, 3-89
Power Meter, setting GPIB address, HP437B, F-14
Power meter, TX acceptance tests, 4-6
Power Meter Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-3
Power supply, converter redundancy, 3-111
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-15
power supply/converter redundancy, 3-111
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-4
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-2
test data sheets, A-3
RFDS
Calibration, 3-106
DC Power Pre–test, 2-12
Description, 3-99
initial power–up, 2-15
Layout, 1-35
Parameter Settings, 3-99
Set Configuration Data, 3-105
RFDS calibration, procedure, 3-107
RFDS parameters
checking, 3-100
setting, 3-100
RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-106
rho, 4-7
Prepare to Leave the Site
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification, 5-5
External Test Equipment Removal, 5-4
Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-2
ROM Code, Download, G-2
router configuration, initial , J-20
Router Configuration Files, Canned, J-8
Router Initial Configuration, J-2
Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
router power–up, J-20
PWR/ALM LED
BBX2, 6-27
CSM, 6-22
DC/DC Converter, 6-21
generic, 6-21
MCC, 6-27
Router Serial Communication, J-5
RDM, 6-14
Sector Configuration, 1-30
Reduced ATP, 4-3, 6-9
Selecting Test Equipment, 3-75
RS–232 to GPIB Interface, 1-8
RS232 GPIB Interface Box, F-16
RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-18
RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-8
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-104
redundancy/alarm tests, 3-109
Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-105
Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-42
Set–up for TX Calibration, 3-91
Reference Distribution Module, 6-14
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-83
Required documents, 1-12
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-84
Required test equipment, communications system
analyzer, 1-9
SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-6
Required Test Equipment and Software, 1-6
Signal Generator, 3-82
Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-4
RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-24
signal generator, 1X FER acceptance test, 4-6
Revision History, xxv
Site, equipage verification, 3-4
Oct 2003
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-7
Index
68P09258A31–A
Site checklist, data sheets, A-3
Site equipage, CDF/NECF, 3-3
Site I/O board, T1 span cable connection, 5-9
Site Serial Number Check List, A-19
Software Release caveats, 5-2
Span Framing Format
configure, 5-6
verify, 5-5
Span I/O board
E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-15
T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-15
Span Line
connector , 6-14
T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-11
Span line, troubleshooting, 6-29
Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-32
Span line traffic, No or missing, 6-17
SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-24
Spectral Purity TX Mask, 4-7
Spectrum Analyzer, 1-11, 3-82
Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-57
STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-24
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-23
System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-18
Test data sheets
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-18
BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-17
general optimization checklist, A-5
GPS receiver operation, A-6
initial power tests, A-4
LFR receiver operation, A-7
LPA
convergence, A-9
IM Reduction, A-8
pre–power tests, A-4
preliminary operations, A-3
RX antenna VSWR, A-18
site checklist, A-3
TX antenna VSWR, A-17
TX BLO
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-10
Power Output Verification, A-15
Test Equipment
Automatically Selecting, 3-77
Calibrating, 3-78
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-56
Manually Selecting, 3-76
Reference Chart, 3-58
Selecting, 3-75
verification data sheets, A-2
VSWR, I-2
Test equipment
system analyzer, 1-9
TX acceptance tests, 4-6
Test Equipment Setup, 3-56
GPS & LFR/HSO, 3-46
HP PCS Interface, F-23
RF path calibration, 3-89
T1
isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-15
span connection, 5-9
Test Matrix, C-4
ATP optimization, C-3
terminal communication settings, J-3
Top Interconnect Plate, 1-21
Index-8
Timing Reference Cables, 1-10
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
Index
68P09258A31–A
Troubleshooting
BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line
Traffic, 6-17
BLO Calibration Failure, 6-7
C–CCP Backplane, 6-14, 6-15
Calibration Audit Failure, 6-8
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, 6-10
Code Download Failure, 6-5
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
6-4
CSM Checklist, 6-12
Data Download Failure, 6-5
DC Power Problems, 6-19
Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-6
Login Failure, 6-3
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR,
6-17
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over
Co–located GLI2, 6-16
Miscellaneous Failures, 6-6
Multi–FER Failure, 6-11
No BBX2 Control in the Shelf – No Control over
Co–located GLI2s, 6-17
No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module,
6-20
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,
6-19
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,
6-16
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-16
No MCC24 Channel Elements, 6-18
Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-3
Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,
6-9
Set span configuration, 6-32
span problems, 6-29
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-20
TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-9
TSU NAM
Parameters, 3-102
Program, 3-108
TX Audit Test, 3-95
TX BLO, test data sheets
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-10
Power Output Verification, A-15
Tx BLO Nominal Offset, Setup for TX Cal, 3-91
TX calibration, 3-92
All Cal/Audit, 3-92
set–up, Agilent 8935, 3-65, 3-68
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) ATP Background, 4-14
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor ATP
Background, 4-13
TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,
illustration, 4-12
TX OUT connection, 4-5
TX Output Acceptance Tests
Code domain power, 4-7
Pilot Time Offset, 4-7
Spectral purity TX mask, 4-7
Waveform quality (rho), 4-7
TX Path, calibration, 3-86
TX path
audit, 3-95
calibration, 3-89
TX path calibration, 3-92
TX Pilot Time Offset ATP Background, 4-13
TX Spectral Purity (Tx Mask) ATP Background, 4-11
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) ATP Background, 4-12
Updating Calibration Data Files
Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC, 5-2
Software Release caveats, 5-2
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-17
TX
acceptance tests, equipment setup, 4-6
antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-85
Verification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-2
Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-37
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWR
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel
1700 MHz, E-8
1900 MHz, E-3
800 MHz, E-5
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-20
Oct 2003
TX ATP Setup, 3-72
VSWR
Advantest Test Set, I-5
Calculation, I-4, I-6
Equation, I-4, I-6
manual test setup detail
Advantest illustration, I-7
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Index-9
Index
HP illustration, I-4, I-5
required test equipment, I-2
transmit and receive antenna, I-2
Walsh channels, 4-13
Warm–up, 1-7
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-7
Index-10
68P09258A31–A
When to optimize
Ancillary – table, C-2
BTS, C-2
inter–frame cabling, C-3
Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-17
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Oct 2003
*68P09258A31−A*
68P09258A31–A
Technical
Information
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Software Release R2.16.3.x
800 and 1900 Mhz
CDMA
ENGLISH
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
SOFTWARE RELEASE X.X.X
800 and 1900 Mhz
CDMA
ENGLISH
Oct 2003
68P09258A31–A
STANDARD MANUAL PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS
Filename:
Part Number: 68P09258A31–A
APC:
Title: 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP
Volume
of
Print Vendor:
Date
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS – FOR REFERENCE–DO NOT MODIFY
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
PAPER:
1st. LEVEL TABS: 2nd. LEVEL TABS:
Body: 70 lb.
Inside Cover: 65 lb. Cougar
Tabs: 110 lb. Index
Binder Cover: Standard TED
cover – 10 pt. Carolina
Single Sided
5 Cuts
Clear Mylar
Pantone 2706–C
Black Ink
Single Sided
7 Cuts
Clear Mylar
White
Black Ink
FINISHING:
3–Ring Binder
Slant–D
3–Hole Punched
(5/16–in. dia.)
Shrink Wrap Body
Black ink for body, inside cover, and binder cover.
TAB and SHEET SIZE/QUANTITY
7X9
8.5x11
11x17
1st Level Tabs
Sheets = (Total Pages) / 2
2nd Level Tabs
NON–STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Tape Bound
Corner Stitch
Other: Meet with manager to determine the deliverable.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2003:11:06 11:52:06-06:00
Create Date                     : 2003:11:06 11:47:19-06:00
Title                           : 1X SC4812T BTS Optimization/ATP; Release 2.16.3.x
Author                          : Motorola
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 313